, 


>X>     ! 


>"1 

i^>  Vi)  »>> 

>>  .»*   »   > 

'  jaiT    *  ' 

> 

> 

ZSKi 

*■  -J+    ' 

> 

-^^  ^  }r  ^ 

r-v 

> 

_za 

>>    >> 

>     * 

6> 

IK 

Zm-^-'~ 

^ — ■^ 

>%^>:^> 

>4> 

?3> 
±3* 

>H 

►**  ^3 

s» :> >:>  >i 

>;:s 

*■       >  ' 

£^\f' 

'  /';v   ;»  !>i^>  • 

i»>  ^>  •• 

'->>:: 

S»^^*T>  »  ^ 

*-» ,  *>**"  > 

T  ■  > 

'*  .3b 

»►     :>  >~Zlfc    :>>    ■  >     -*' 

'    ,  >  \  y>*~"m>v»    v 

"     >> 

>  > 

^J» 

*  .'  '..^... 

>> 

'    >  >^^^^^^W 

H^l ! 

-J? 

.«»     _7»      >/*»    > 

• 

2D>  3»  >^ 


>  ■ 


^:^§§ 


v*->*     >  >> 


f>> 


~-*~  *,         taste. 


m> 


>■>  :.:aev^riii 


r    "•     -3*-^-*-P*'-3'&1*f 


£s&S»-r-    <3^/?A-S7, 


t? 


'^^-ZZ^'*' 


^^r 


THE 


HAND-BOOK  OF  ARTILLERY, 


SERVICE  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES 

(ARMY  AND  MILITIA.) 


BY  ♦., 

CAPT.   JOSEPH    ROBERTS, 

4th   Regt.  Art.  U.  S.  Abht. 


•      *,X 

SI'.COND     EDITION       REVISED,     .^N^TE^I.AffGED 


RICHMOND,    VA.: 

WEST      &      JOHNSTON 

1862. 


Evans  &  Cogswell.  Printers. 
No.  3  Broad  St..  Charleston.  S.  C. 


J 

j 

#  36 


PKOCEEDLNGS 


The  following  Report  was  made  by  the  Committee  ap- 
pointed at  a  meeting  of  the  staff  of  the  Artillery  School 
at  Fort  Monroe,  Va.,  to  whom  the  commanding  officer  of 
the  School  had  referred  this  work  : 

Your  Committee  to  which  has  been  referred  the  consid- 
eration of  the  work  of  Captain  Roberts,  proposed  as  a 
text-book  for  the  Artillery  School,  beg  leave  to  submit  the 
following  Report,  viz  : 

The  work  submitted  by  Captain  Roberts,  and  entitled 
"Hand-Rook  of  Artillery,"  embraces  sections  on  the  fol- 
lowing subjects : 

[For   subjects  see  Table  of  Contents,  page  7.] 

Under  each  of  these  heads,  except  the  last,  the  work 
contains  a  number  of  questions  and  answers.  Your  Com- 
mittee have  carefully  examined  each  »f  these  questions 
and  their  corresponding  answers,  and  find  that  the  an- 
swers have  been  principally  drawn  Trom  the*  following 
sources,  viz  :  Gibbon's  Artillerist's  Manual,  Light  and 
Heavy  Artillery  Tactics,  and  the  Ordnance  Manual,  all 
of  which  works  have  been  authorized  by  the  War  Depart- 
ment. "Wherever  the  prescribed  authorities  furnish  the 
means  of  answering  the  questions,  they  appear  to  have 
been  followed  as  closely  as  possible. 

In  the  opinion  of  your  Committee,  the  arrangement  of 
the    subjects  and  the  selection  of  the  several  questions 


4  PROCEEDINGS. 

and  answers  have  been  judicious.  The  work  is  ono  which 
may  be  advantageously  used  for  reference  by  the  officers, 
and  is  admirably  adapted  to  the  instruction  of  noncom- 
missioned  officers  and  privates  o£  Artillery. 

Your  Committee  do  therefore  recommend  that  it  bo  sub- 
stituted as  a  text-book  in  place  of  "  Burns'  Questions  and 
Answurs  on  Artillery." 

(Signed)  I.  VOGDES, 

Capt.  1st  Art'y. 
(Signed)  E.  0.  C.  ORD, 

Capt.  3d  Art'y. 
(Signed)  J.  A.  HASKIN, 

Bvt.  Maj.  and  Capt.  1st  Art'y. 

The  preceding  Report  was  adopted,  and  the  staff  recom- 
mended this  work  as  a  book  of  instruction  at  the  Artillery 
School,  in  lieu  of  "  Burns'  Questions  and  Answers  on  Ar- 
tillery." 


s 


PEEPACB  TO  SECOND  EDITION 


The  following  compilation  was  prepared  for  the  instruc- 
tion of  noncommissioned  officers  and  privates  of  the  Ar- 
tillery School,  where  it  is  now  in  successful  use  as  a  text- 
book. Much  of  the  matter  is  taken  from  Burns'  Questions 
and  Answers  on  Artillery,  Gibbon's  Artillerist's  Manual, 
Heavy  Artillery  Tactics,  the  Ordnance  Manual,  and  Kings- 
bury's Artillery  and  Infantry. 

In  the  preface  to  the  first  edition,  the  compiler  inad- 
vertently omitted  to  acknowledge  his  indebtedness  to  the 
proof-sheets  of  a  forthcoming  work  on  Ordnance  and 
Gunnery,  by  Captain  Benton,  for  a  portion  of  the  matter 
of  the  Appendix  on  Rifle  cannon. 

The  compiler  is  under  great  obligations  to  several  of 
his  brother  officers  at  Fort  Monroe  (especially  to  Major 
Haskin,  1st  Artillery),  for  their  kindness  in  assisting  him 
in  the  compilation  of  this  little  volume,  and  for  impor- 
tant suggestions  in  the  revision  of  many  of  the  "answers." 

Fort  Monroe,  Va.,  1861. 


TABLE   OF   CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

3 


Proceedings,     .  , 

Preface  to  Second  Edition,    .... 

General  Table  of  Contents, 

Part  I,  Section  1.  On  Artillery  in  General 

«  «       2.  On  Guns,     .... 

"  "       3.  On  Howitzers,  . 

"  "       4.  On  Columbiads, 

"  "       5.  On  Mortars, 

"  "       6.  On  Sea-coast  Artillery, 

"  "       7.  Siege  Artillery, 

".  "       8.  Field  Guns  and  Field  Batteries,  43 

Part  II,      "       1.  Pointing  Guns  and  Howitzers,      55 

"  "       2.  Pointing  Mortars,    ...       61 

Part  III.  Charges, 

IV.  Ranges,    . 

V.  Ricochet, 

VI.  Recoil,     . 

VII.  Windage, 

VIII.  Gunpowder,     . 


8  CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

Part  IX.  Projectiles 98 

X.  Laboratory  Stores,       ....    119 

XL    Platforms.. 129 

XII.  Artillery  Carriages  AftD  Machines,       134 

XIII.  Pracik  Ai.  Guhnert,       .         .         .        .162 

XIV.    MlSCELLANEOolj 107 

Aim'kndjx — Rifle  Cannon, 180 

Ixokx,    • 186 


THE 

HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 


Part  I.     Section  I. 
AETILLEEY  IN  GENERAL. 

1.  What  is  understood  by  the  term  artil- 
lery ? 

Heavy  pieces  of  every  description,  with 
the  implements  and  materials  necessary  for 
their  use. 

2.  How  many  kinds  of  pieces  are  employed 
in  the  land  service  of  the  United  States  ? 

Pour,  viz  :  Guns,  Howitzers,  Columbiads 
and  Mortars. 

3.  How  are  these  distinguished  ? 
According  to  their  use,  as  Sea-coast,  Gar- 
rison, Siege  and  Field  Artillery. 

4.  What  metals  are  used  in  their  construc- 
tion ? 

All  heavy  pieces,  such  as  those  for  sea- 
coast,  siege  and  garrison  equipment,  are 
made  of  iron  ;  and  those  for  field  service,  of 
bronze. 

5.  What  is  bronze  for  cannon? 

An  alloy  consisting  of  90  parts  of  copper 
and  10  of  tin,  allowing  a  variation  of  one 
part  of  tin  more  or  less.  It  is  commonly 
called  brass. 


10  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

6.  Why  is  bronze  used  in  preference  to  iron, 
for  field  pieces  ? 

This  metal  having  greater  tenacity  and 
strength  than  iron,  the  pieces  can  be  made 
lighter. 

7.  In  what  respect  does  iron  merit  a  prefer- 
ence ? 

Iron  is  less  expensive  than  bronze,  and  is 
more  capable  of  sustaining  long-continued 
firing  with  larger  charges;  such  pieces  are, 
therefore,  better  calculated  for  the  constant 
heavy  firing  of  sieges. 

Note.—  In  the  sieges  in  Spain,  bronze  guns  could  never 
support  a  heavier  fire  than  120  rounds  in  twenty-four 
hours,  and  were  never  used  to  batter  at  distances  exceeding 
300  yards:  whereas,  with  iron  guns,  three  times  that  num- 
ber of  rounds  were  fired  with  effect,  from  three  times  the 
distance,  for  several  consecutive  days,  without  any  other 
injury  than  the  enlargement  of  their  vents.  The  compara- 
tive power  of  conducting  heat  in  iron  and  copper  being 
respectively  as  3.743  to  S.932,  taking  gold  at  10.000,  it  is 
evident  that  in  practising  with  iron  and  bronze  pieces  of 
the  same  calibre,  it  would  soon  become  necessary  to  reduce 
the  charges  in  the  bronze  pieces,  and.  also,  to  increase  the 
time  between  the  discharges,  to  prevent  their  softening 
and  drooping  ;  while  with  iron,  full  charges  and  rapid 
firing  may  be  kept  up. 

8.  What  additional  objection  has  been  urged 
to  bronze  for  cannon  ? 

The  difficulty  of  forming  a  perfect  alloy, 
in  consequence  of  the  difference  of  fusibility 
of  tin  and  copper. 

9.  What  iron  pieces  are  used  in  the  land 
service  ? 

12,  IS  and  24-pdr.  siege  and  garrison  guns. 
ol  and  42-pdr.  sea-coast  guns,  S-in.  siege  and 
24-pdr.  garrison  howitzers,  8  and  10-in.  sea- 


ARTILLERY   IN    GENERAL.  11 

coast  howitzers,  8  and  10-in.  columbiads,* 
8  and  10-in.  siege,  and  10  and  13-in.  sea-coast 
mortars. 

Note.  The  24-pdr.  eprouvette  is  also  of  iron,  and  used 
for  the  proof  of  powder. 

10.  What  are  the  kinds  of  bronze  pieces  in 
use  at  present  ? 

6  and  12-pdi*.  field  guns;  12-pdr.  mountain 
howitzer;  12,  24  and  32-pdr.  field  howitzers; 
stone  and  24-pdr.  Coehorn  mortars. 

11.  What  is  a  battery  ? 

This  term  is  applied  to  one  or  more  pieces, 
or  to  the  place  where  they  are  served. 

12.  What  regulates  the  dimensions  of  a  piece  ? 
Its  calibre  and  the  tenacity  and  elasticity 

of  the  metals  employed  in  its  fabrication. 
Its  thickness  must  be  proportioned  to  the 
effect  developed  by  the  powder;  and  the 
length  is  determined  by  experiment,  and 
should  not  exceed  24  calibres.  The  exterior 
surface  of  a  cannon  is  composed  of  several 
surfaces,  more  or  less  inclined  to  the  axis  of 
the  bore,  the  forms  of  which  have  been 
determined  by  experiment. 

13.  Why  is  a.  piece  made  stronger  near  the 
breech  than  toward  the  muzzle? 

Because  the  elastic  force  of  the  inflamed 
gunpowder  is  there  greatest,  constantly  di- 
minishing in  intensity  as  the  space  increases 
in  which  it  acts. 

14.  What  is  the  length  of  a  piece? 

*  Those  of  the  new  pattern  are  denominated  64  and 
128-pdrs. 


12  II'  Of    ART] 

The  distance  from  (lie  rear  of  the  base- 
ring  to  1 

15.   What  ts  length  ? 

16. 

the  part  bored  oat.  viz:  the 
cylinder,  the  chamber  (if  there  is  one),  and 
the  conical  or  spherical  circle  connecting 
them. 

17.  What  is  y  the  calibre  of  a 

The  dii  of  the  boi 

18.  Ho  umber  of 

calibres  in 

Divide  the  length  of  the  cylinder,  in 
inche  number  of  inches  in  the  cali- 

bre. 

19.  The  number  q  nown,  how 
do  you  find  the  length  of  the  cylinder? 

Multiply  the  number  of  calibres  by  the 
•calibre  in  inches. 

nt  by  the  sigb  piece? 

Artificial  marks  >iece  for  determin- 

ing the  line  of  fire. 

21.  Roio  are  the  s  r mined? 
Usually  by  means  of  the  gunner's  level, 

when  the  trunnions  are  perfectly  horizontal. 

22.  What  is  the  line  of  metal  or  the  natu- 
ral li  ght? 

A  line  drawn  from  the  highest  point  of 
the  base-ring  to  the  highest  point  on  tho 
swell  of  the  muzzle. 

23.  What  is  the  axjs  of  a  piece? 
The  central  line  of  the  bore. 


ARTILLERY    IN    GENERAL.  13 

24.  What  is  the  natural  angle  of  sight? 
The  angle  which  the  natural  line  of  sight 

makes  with  the  axis  of  the  piece. 

25.  What  is  the  dispart  of  a  piece  ? 

It  is  the  difference  of  the  semi-diameter  of 
the  base-ring  and  the  swell  of  the  muzzle, 
or  the  muzzle-band.  It  is,  therefore,  the 
tangent  of  the  natural  angle  of  sight  to  a 
radius  equal  to  the  distance  from  the  rear 
of  the  1  cisc-ring  to  the  highest  point  of  the 
swell  of  the  muzzle,  or  the  front  of  the 
muzzle-band,  as  the  case  may  be,  measured 
parallel  to  the  axis. 

2(3.   Give  the  nomenclature  of  a  piece. 

The  cascable  is  the  part  of  the  gun  in  rear 
of  the  base-ring,  and  is  composed  generally 
of  the  knob,  the  neck,  the  fillet  and  the  base 
of  the  breech. 

The  base  of  the  breech  is  a  frustum  of  a 
cone,  or  a  spherical  segment  in  rear  of  the 
breech. 

The  base-ring*  is  a  projecting  band  of 
metal  adjoining  the  base  of  the  breech,  and 
connected  with  the  body  of  the  gun  by  a 
concave  moulding. 

The  breech  is  the  mass  of  solid  metal 
behind  the  bottom  of  the  bore,  extending  to 
the  rear  of  the  base-ring. 

The  reinforce  is  the  thickest  part  of  the 
body  of  the  gun,  in  front  of  the  breech;  if 
there  be  more  than  one  reinforce,  that  which 

*This  has  been  dispensed  with  in  the  brass  12-pdr.  of 
the  new  pattern  (the  Napoleon  gun),  and  in  the  new-model 
columbiads. 

2 


14  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

is  next  the  breech  is  called  the  first  reinforce; 
the  other  the  sccoml  reinforce. 

The  rein  force-*  and  is  at  the  Junction  of 
the  first  and  second  reinforces,  in  the  heavy 
howitzers  and  columbiads. 

The  chase  is  the  conical  part  of  the  gun 
in  front  of  the  reinforce. 

The  astragal  and  fillets  in  field  guns, 
and  the  chase-ring  in  other  pieces,  are  the 
mouldings  at  the  front  end  of  the  chase. 

The  neck  is  the  smallest  part  of  the  piece 
in  front  of  the  astragal  or  the  chase-ring. 

The  swell  of  the  muzzle  is  the  largest 
part  of  the  gun  in  front  of  the  neck.  It  is 
terminated  by  the  muzzle-mouldings,  which, 
in  field  and  siege  guns,  consist  of  the  lip  and 
fillet.  In  sea-coast  guns,  and  heavy  howit- 
zers and  columbiads,  there  is  no  fillet.  In 
field  and  siege  howitzers,  and  in  mortars,  a 
muzzle-band  takes  the  place  of  the  swell  of 
the  muzzle. 

The  face  of  the  piece  is  the  terminating 
plane  perpendicular  to  the  axis  of  the  bore. 

The  trunnions  are  cylinders,  the  axis  of 
which  are  in  a  line  perpendicular  to  the  axis 
of  the  bore,  and  in  the  same  plane  with  that 
axis. 

The  rimbases  are  short  cylinders  uniting 
the  trunnions  with  the  body  of  the  gun. 
The  ends  of  the  rimbases,  or  the  shotildcrs 
of  the  trunnions,  are  planes  perpendicular 
to  the  axis  of  the  trunnions. 

The  bore  of  the  piece  includes  all  the 
part  bored  out,  viz  :  the  cylinder,  the  cham- 


ARTILLERY   IN    GENERAL.  15 

ber  (if  there   is  one),  and  the    conical    or 
spherical  surface  connecting  them. 

The  chamber  in  howitzers,  columbiads, 
and  mortars,  is  the  smallest  part  of  the  bore, 
and  contains  the  charge  of  powder.  In  the 
howitzers  and  columbiads,*  the  chamber 
is  cylindrical;  and  is  united  with  the  large 
cylinder  of  the  bore  by  a  conical  surface; 
the  angles  of  intersection  of  this  conical 
surface  with  the  cylinders  of  the  bore  and 
chamber,  are  rounded  (in  profile)  by  arcs  of 
circles.  In  the  8-in.  siege  howitzer,  the 
chamber  is  united  with  the  cylinder  of  the 
bore  by  a  spherical  surface,  in  order  that  the 
shell  may,  when  necessary,  be  inserted  with- 
out a  sabot. 

The  bottom  of  the  bore,  (to  facilitate 
sponging)  is  a  plane  perpendicular  to  the 
axis,  united  with  the  sides  (in  profile)  by  an 
arc  of  a  circle  the  radius  of  which  is  one- 
fourth  the  diameter  of  the  bore  at  the 
bottom.  In  the  columbiads,  the  heavy  sea- 
coast  mortars,  stone-mortar,  and  eprouvette, 
the  bottom  of  the  bore  is  hemispherical. 

The  muzzle,  or  mouth  of  the  bore,  is 
chamfered  to  a  depth  of  0.15  inch  to  0.5 
inch  (varying  with  the  size  of  the  bore),  in 
order  to  prevent  abrasion,  and  to  facilitate 
loading. 

The  true  windage  is  the  difference  be- 
tween the  true  diameters  of  the  bore  and 'of 
the  ball. 

*  The  new  columbiad  is  made  without  a  chamber. 


16  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

27.   What  is  the  vent? 

The  aperture  through  which  fire  is  com- 
municated to  the  charge. 

2S.  What  is  to  be  observed  in  reference  to 
the  diameter  of  the  vent  ? 

It  should  be  as  small  as  the  use  of  the 
priming  wire  and  tube  will  allow. 

29.  Why? 

As  the  velocity  of  the  gasses  arising  from 
the  combustion  of  the  powder  is  extremely 
great,  a  large  amount  escapes  through  the 
vent,  which  contributes  nothing  to  the  velo- 
city of  the  projectile.  It,  therefore,  follows, 
that  the  effect  produced  by  a  given  charge 
will  diminish  as  the  diameter  of  the  vent 
increases.  Besides,  on  account  of  the  in- 
crease of  power  in  the  current  that  escapes 
from  them,  large  vents  are  more  rapidly  in- 
jured than  small  ones. 

30.  What  is  the  diameter  of  the  vent  ? 

0.2  of  an  inch  in  all  pieces  except  the 
eprouvette,  in  which  it  is  0.1. 

31.  What  is  the  position  of  the  axis  of  the 
vent  ? 

The  axis  of  the  vent  is  in  a  plane  passing 
through  the  axis  of  the  bore,  perpendicular 
to  the  axis  of  the  trunnions.  In  guns,  and 
in  howitzers  having  cylindrical  chambers, 
the  vent  is  placed  at  an  angle  of  80°  with 
the  axis  of  the  bore,  and  it  enters  the  bore 
at"a  distance  from  the  bottom  equal  to  one- 
fourth  the  diameter  of  the  bore.  As  this 
inclination  renders  it  easy  to  pull  the  fric- 
tion-tube out  of  the  vent,  that  of  the  new 


ARTILLERY   IN    GENERAL.  17 

12-pdr.  field  gun,  and  the  new  columbiads, 
has  been  placed  perpendicular  to  the  axis. 

32.  What  are  the  quarter -sights  of  a 
piece  ? 

Divisions  marked  on  the  upper  quarters 
of  the  base-ring,  commencing  where  it  would 
be  .intersected  by  a  plane  parallel  to  the 
axis  of  the  piece,  and  tangent  to  the  upper 
surface  of  the  trunnions. 

Note. — Not  used  in  our  service. 

33.  To  what  use  are  the  quarter-siqhts  ap- 
plied t 

For  giving  elevations  up  to  three  degrees; 
but  especially  for  pointing  a  piece  at  a  less 
elevation  than  the  natural  angle  of  sight. 

34.  What  is  a  breecu-sight  ? 

An  instrument  having  a  graduated  scale 
of  tangents,  by  means  of  which  any  eleva- 
tion may  be  given  to  a  piece. 

35.  IIoio  are  the  divisions  of  the  tangent- 
scale  found? 

By  taking  the  length  of  the  piece,  from 
the  rear  of  the  base-ring  to  the  swell  of  the 
muzzle,  measured  on  a  line  parallel  to  the 
axis,  and  multiplying  it  by  the  natural  tan- 
gent of  as  many  degrees  as  may  be  required, 
and  then  deduct  the  dispart.  Thus,  for  5° 
elevation,  and  the  gun  supposed  to  be  5  feet, 
or  60  inches  long,  multiply  .08748,  which  is 
the  natural  tangent  of  5°,  by  60;  the  pro- 
duct gives  5.2488  inches ;  supposing  the  dis- 
part to  be  1  inch,  the  graduating  of  the 
tangent-scale  will  be  4.2488  inches. 


18  HAND-BOOK   OF   ARTILLERY. 

36.  With  what  pieces  are  breech-sights  used? 
Guns  and  howitzers. 

37.  What  is  a  pendulum-hausse  ? 

It  is  a  tangent-scale,  the  graduations  of 
which  arc  the  tangents  of  each  quarter  of  a 
degree  of  elevation,  to*  a  radius  equal  to  the 
distance  between  the  muzzle-sight  of  the 
piece,  and  the  axis  of.  vibration  of  the 
hausse,  which  is  one  inch  in  rear  of  the  base- 
ring.  At  the  lower  end  of  the  scale  is  a 
brass  bulb  filled  with  lead.  The  slider,  which 
marks  the  divisions  on  the  scale,  is  of  thin 
brass,  and  is  clamped  at  any  desired  division 
of  the  scale  by  means  of  a  screw.  The  scale 
passes  through  a  slit  in  a  piece  of  steel,  with 
which  it  is  connected  by  a  screw,  forming  a 
pivot  on  which  the  scale  can  vibrate  lateral- 
ly. This  piece  of  steel  terminates  in  pivots, 
by  means  of  which  the  pendulum  is  sup- 
ported on  the  seat  attached  to  the  gun,  and 
is  at  liberty  to  vibrate  in  the  direction  of  the 
axis  of  the  piece.  The  seat  is  of  metal,  and 
is  fastened  to  the  base  of  the  breech  by 
screws,  so  that  the  centres  of  the  steel  piv- 
ots of  vibration  shall  be  at  a  distance  from 
the  axis  of  the  piece  equal  to  the  radius  of 
the  base-ring. 

A  muzzle-sight  of  iron  is  screwed  into 
the  swell  of  the  muzzle  of  guns,  or  into  the 
middle  of  the  muzzle-ring  of  howitzers. 
The  height  of  this  sight  is  equal  to  the  dis- 
part of  the  piece,  so  that  a  line  joining  the 
muzzle-sight  and  the  pivot  of  the  tangent- 
scale  is  parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  piece. 


ARTILLERY   IN    GENERAL.  19 

38.  What  is  a  gunner's  level,  or  gimner's 
perpendicular  f 

An  instrument  made  of  sheet-brass;  the 
lower  part  is  cut  in  the  form  of  a  crescent, 
the  points  of  which  are  made  of  steel ;  a 
small  spirit-level  is  fastened  to  one  side  of 
the  plate,  parallel  to  the  line  joining  the 
points  of  the  crescent,  and  a  slider  is  fas- 
tened to  the  same  side  of  the  plate,  perpen- 
dicular to  the  axis  of  the  level. 

39.  What  is  it  used  for  f 

To  mark  the  points  of  sights  on  pieces. 

40.  Wfxat  is  a  plummet  ? 

A  simple  line  and  bob  for  pointing  mortars. 

41.  What  is  a  gunner's  quadrant  ? 

It  is  a  graduated  quarter  of  a  circle  of 
sheet-brass,  attached  to  a  brass  rule  18  inches 
long.  It  has  a  vernier  turning  on  a  pivot, 
to  which  is  attached  a  spirit-level.  To  get 
a  required  elevation,  the  vernier  is  fixed  at 
the  indicated  degree,  the  brass  rule  is  then 
inserted  in  the  bore  parallel  to  the  axis  of 
the  piece ;  the  gun  is  then  elevated  or  de- 
pressed until  the  level  is  horizontal. 

There  is  another  graduated  quadrant  of 
wood,  of  6  inches  radius,  attached  to  a  rule 
23.5  inches  long.  It  has  a  plumb-line  and 
bob,  which  are  carried,  when  not  in  use,  in  a 
hole  in  the  end  of  the  rule,  covered  by  a 
brass  plate. 

42.  What  is  an  elevating-arc,  and  its  use? 
It  is  an  arc  attached  to  the  rear  part  of  the 

cheek  of  a  gun-carriage,  having  its  centre  in 
the  axis  of  the  trunnions;  the  arc  is  gradu- 


20  HAND-BOOK    OF   ARTILLERY. 

ated  into  degrees  and  parts  of  a  degree.  By 
placing  the  axis  of  the  piece  horizontal,  and 
marking  the  breech  at  an}-  one  of  the  divis- 
ions on  the  arc,  any  elevation  or  depression 

required  will  be  noted  by  the  number  of  de- 
grees below  or  above  this  mark,  ft  turns  on 
a  pivot  which  admits  of  the  arc,  when  not 
in  use,  being  placed  inside  the  cheek  to 
which  it  is  attached. 

43.  What  is  the  use  of  the  knob  of  the  casca- 
ble? 

To  facilitate  the  handling  of  the  piece  in 
mounting  and  dismounting  it,  and  moving  it 
when  off  its  carriage. 

44.  Of  what  vse  are  the  trunnions  of  a  piece? 
By  means  of  them  the  piece  is   attached 

to  its  carriage;  and  by  heing  placed  near 
the  centre  of  gravity,  it  is  easily  elevated  or 
depressed. 

4").    What  are  the  dolphins  of  a  piece  f 
Two  handles  placed  upon  the  piece,  with 
their  centres  over  the  centre  of  gravity,  by 
which  it  is  mounted  or  dismounted. 

46.  Are  all  pieces  provided  with  dolphins  ? 
Only  the   12-pdr.   brass  guns,  and  the  24 

and  32-pdr.  brass  howitzers. 

47.  What  is  understood  by  the  preponder- 
ance of  a  piece  ? 

It  is  the  excess  of  weight  of  the  part  in 
rear  of  the  trunnions  over  that  in  front;  it 
is  measured  by  the  lifting  force  in  pounds. 
which  in ust  be  applied  at  the  rear  of  the 
base-rintj  to  balance  the  piece  when  suspend- 
ed freely  on  the  axis  of  the  trunnions. 


ARTILLERY    IN    GENERAL.  21 

48.  Why  is  this  preponderance  given?   * 
To  prevent  the  sudden  dipping  of  the  muz- 
zle in  firing,  and  violent  concussion  on  the 
carriage  at  the  breech. 

49.  What  is  bushing  apiece  of  artillery? 
Inserting  a  piece  of  metal  about  an  inch 

in  diameter  (near  the  bottom  of  the  bore), 
through  the  centre  of  which  the  vent  has 
been  previously  drilled.     It  is  screwed  in. 

50.  What  kind  of  metal  is  used  for  bushing 
bronze  pieces? 

Pure  copper  always,  which  is  not  so  liable 
to  run  from  heat  as  gun-metal. 

51.  What  is  the  object  of  bushing  a  piece? 
To  prevent  deterioration  of  the  vent,  or 

provide  a  new  one  when  this  lias  already 
occurred. 

52.  Is  all  new  artillery  bushed  ? 

]S~o,  only  bronze  pieces,  and  iron  pieces 
only  when  repeated  firing  has  rendered  it 
absolutely  necessary. 

53.  How  is  artillery  rendered  unserviceable? 

I.  Drive  into  the  vent  a  jagged  and  hard- 
ened steel  spike  with  a  soft  point,  or  a  nail 
without  a  head ;  break  it  oif  flash  with  the 
outer  surface,  and  clinch  the  point  inside  by 
means  of  the  rammer. 

II.  Wedge  a  shot  in  the  bottom  of  the 
bore  by  wrapping  it  with  felt,  or  by  means 
of  iron  wedges,  using  the  rammer  or  a  bar 
of  iron  to  drive  them  in. 

III.  Cause  shells  to  burst  in  the  bore  of 
bronze  guns. 

IV.  Fire  broken  shot  from  them  with 
large  charges. 


*o 


HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 


V.  Fill  the  piece  with  sand  over  the 
charge,  to  burst  it. 

VI.  Fire  a  piece  against  another,  muzzle 
to  muzzle,  or  the  muzzle  of  one  to  the  chase 
of  the  other. 

VII.  Light  a  fire  under  the  chase  of  a 
bronze  gun,  and  strike  on  it  with  a  sledge 
to  bend  it. 

VIII.  Break  off  the  trunnions  of  iron 
guns;  or  burst  them  Irv  firing  them  at  a 
high  elevation,  with  heavy  charges  and  full 
of  shot. 

54.  State  how  to  unspike  a  piece  ? 

If  the  spike  is  not  screwed  in  or  clinched, 
and  the  bore  is  not  impeded,  put  in  a  charge 
of  powder  £  of  the  weight  of  the  shot,  and 
ram  junk  wads  over  it;  laying  on  the  bot- 
tom of  the  bore  a  slip  of  wood,  with  a  groove 
on  the  under  side  containing  a  strand  of 
quick-match,  by  which  fire  is  communicated 
to  the  charge.  In  a  brass  gun,  take  out 
some  of  the  metal  at  the  upper  orifice  of 
the  vent,  and  pour  sulphuric  acid  into  the 
groove,  and  let  it  stand  some  hours  .before 
firing.  If  this  method,  several  times  re- 
peated, is  not  successful,  unscrew  the  vent- 
piece  if  it  be  a  brass  gun;  and  if  an  iron 
one,  drill  out  the  spike,  or  drill  a  new  vent. 

55.  Explain  how  to  drive  out  a  shot  wedged 
in  the  bore  ? 

Unscrew  the  vent-piece,  if  there  be  one, 
and  drive  in  wedges  so  as  to  start  the  shot 
forward;  then  ram  it  back  again  in  order  to 
seize  the   wedge  with  a   hook ;  or  pour  in 


ARTILLERY    IN    GENERAL.  23 

powder,  and  fire  it  after  replacing  the  vent- 
piece.  In  the  last  resort,  bore  a  hole  in  the 
bottom  of  the  breech,  drive  out  the  shot, 
and  stop  the  hole  with  a  screw. 

5G.    What  is  scaling  a  piece  of  artillery? 

Flashing  oif  a  small  quantity  of  powder 
to  clean  out  the  bore;  about  T*3  of  the  shot's 
weight.     The  practice  is  discontinued. . 

57.  How  are  cannon  in  our  service  marked? 
As   follows,  viz. :   The  number  of  the  gun 

and  the  initials  of  the  inspector's  name  on  the 
face  of  the  muzzle — the  numbers  in  a  sepa- 
rate series  for  each  kind  and  calibre  at  each 
foundry;  the  initial  letters  of  the  name  of 
the  founder,  and  of  the  foundry,  on  the  end 
of  the  right  trunnion;  the  ij  ear  of  fabrication 
on  the  end  of  the  left  trunnion;  the  foundry 
number  on  the  end  of  the  right  rim  base, 
above  the  trunnion;  the  weight  of  the  piece  in 
'pounds  on  the  base  of  the  breech;  the  letters 
U.  S.  on  the  upper  surface  of  the  piece,  near 
the  end  of  the  reinforce. 

58.  What  marks  are  used  to  designate  con- 
demned pieces  ? 

Pieces  rejected  on  inspection  arc  marked 
X  C  on  the  face  of  the  muzzle;  if  Condemn- 
ed for  erroneous  dimensions  which  cannot 
be  remedied,  add  X  D  ;  if  by  powder  proof, 
X  P ;  if  by  water  proof,  X  AV. 

59.  What  are  the  kinds  of  proof  which  artil- 
lery must  undergo,  before  being  received  into 
the  service  ? 

1st.  They  are  gauged  as  to  their  several 
dimensions,   internal    and    external;   as   to 


24  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

justness  and  position  of  the  bore,  the  cham- 
ber, vent,  trunnions,  etc. 

2d.  They  are  tired  with  a  regulated  charge 
of    powder    and     shot,    being     afterwards 

searched  to  discover  irregularities  or  holes 
produced  by  the  firing. 

3d.  By  means  of  engines,  an  endeavor  is 
made  to  force  water  through  them. 

4th  They  are  examined  internally,  by 
means  of  light*  reflected  from  a  mirror. 

60.  Are  brass  cannon  liable  to  external  in- 
jury, caused  by  service  ? 

They  are  little  subject  to  such  injury,  ex- 
cept from  the  bending  of  the  trunnions 
sometimes,  after  long  service  or  heavy 
charges. 

Note. — Recent  experiments  at  Fort  Monroe  show  that 
brass  guns,  when  rijltd,  and  fired  with  large  charges  and 
heavy  shot,  expand  so  much  that  the  projectile  does  not 
take  the  grooves. 

61.  Wlhit  are,  the  causes  of  internal  injury? 
Internal   injuries  are  caused  by  the  action 

of  tlit)  elastic  fluids  developed  in  the  com- 
bustion of  the  powder,  or  by  the  action  of 
the  shot  in  passing  out  of  the  bore. 

62.  Mime  the  injuries  of  the  first  hind. 
Enlargement  of  the  bore  by  the  compression 

of  the  metal ;  corrosion  of  the  metal  at  the 
inner  orifice  of  the  vent,  or  at  the  mouth  of 
the  cylindrical  chamber;  cracks,  from  the 
yielding  of  the  cohesion  of  the  metal ;  cavi- 
ties, cracks  enlarged  by  the  action  of  the 
gas,  and  by  the  melting  of  the  metal,  ob- 
servable especially  in  the  upper  surface  of 
the  bore. 


ARTILLERY   IN    GENERAL.  25 

63.  Name  those  of  the  second  kind. 

The  lodgment  of  the  shot  —  a  compression 
of  the  metal  on  the  lower  side  of  the  bore, 
at  the  seat  of  the  shot,  which  is  caused  by 
the  pressure  of  the  gas  in  escaping  over  the 
top  of  the  shot.  There  is  a  corresponding 
burr  in  front  of  the  lodgment;  and  the  mo- 
tion thereby  given  to  the  shot  causes  it  to 
strike  altera atety  on  the  top  and  bottom  of 
the  bore,  producing  other  enlargements,  gen- 
erally three  in  number:  the  first  on  the 
upper  side  a  little  in  advance  of  the  trun- 
nions; the  second,  on  the  lower  side  about 
the  astragal;  the  third,  in  the  upper  part  of 
the  muzzle  ;  it  is  chiefly  from  this  cause  that 
brass  guns  become  unserviceable.  Scratches, 
caused  by  the  fragments  of  a  broken  shot, 
or  the  roughness  of  an  imperfect  one;  en- 
largement of  the  muzzle  by  the  striking  of  the 
shot  in  leaving  the  bore;  external  cracks,  or 
longitudinal  slits,  caused  by  too  great  a 
compression  of  the  metal  on  the  inside. 

64.  When  is  a  piece  said  to  be  honeycombed  f 
When  the  surface  of  the  bore  is  full  of 

small  boles  and  cavities. 

65.  To  what  is  this  due  ? 

To  the  melting  and  volatilization  of  a 
portion  of  the  tin  in  the  alloy:  tin  being 
much  more  fusible  than  copper. 

66.  Do  lodgments  cause  an  inaccuracy  of 
fire? 

They  do. 

67.  How  may  this  in  a  measure  be  remedied  ? 
By   using   a  wad   over  the  cartridge,  in 

3 


26  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

order  to  change  the  place  of  the  shot;  or 
by  wrapping  the  shot  in  woolen  cloth  or 
paper,  so  as  fco  diminish  the  windage.  In 
field  guns,  the  paper  cap  which  is  taken  off 
the  cartridge  should  always  be  put  over  the 

shot. 

68.  To  what  injuries  are  iron  cannon  subject  ? 
To  the  above  defects  in  a  less  degree  than 

brass,  except  the  corrosion  of  the  metal,  by 
which  the  vent  is  rendered  unserviceable 
from  enlargement.  The  principal  cause  of 
injury  to  iron  cannon  is  the  rusting  of  the 
metal,  producing  a  roughness  and  enlarge- 
ment of  the  bore,  and  an  increase  of  any 
cavities  or  honeycombs  which  may  exist  in 
the  metal. 

69.  How  may  you  judge  of  the  service  of  an 
iron  gun  ? 

Generally  by  the  appearance  of  the  vent. 

70.  What  rules  are  laid  down  for  the  pre- 
servation of  artillery  ? 

Cannon  should  be  placed  together,  accord- 
ing to  kind  and  calibre,  on  skids  of  stone, 
iron,  or  wood,  laid  on  hard  ground  well 
rammed  and  covered  with  a  layer  of  cinders 
or  of  some  other  material  to  prevent  vege- 
tation. In  case  of  guns  and  long  howitzers, 
the  pieces  should  rest  on  the  skids  in  front 
of  the  base-ring  and  in  rear  of  the  astragal, 
the  axis  inclined  at  an  angle  of  4°  or  5° 
with  the  horizon,  the  muzzle  lowest,  the 
trunnions  touching  each  other;  or  the  trun- 
nion of  one  piece  may  rest  on  the  adjoining- 
piece,  so  that  the  axis  of  the  trunnions  may 


ARTILLERY    IN    GENERAL.  Zi 

be  inclined  about  45°  to  the  horizon;  the 
vent  down,  stopped  with  a  greased  wooden 
plug,  or  with  putty  or  tallow.  The  pieces 
may  be  piled  in  two  tiers,  with  skids  placed 
between  them  exactly  over  those  which  rest 
on  the  ground  ;  the  muzzles  of  both  tiers 
in  the  same  direction,  and  their  axis^ pre- 
serving the  same  inclination.  In  case  of 
short  howitzers  and  mortars,  the  pieces  should 
stand  on  their  muzzles,  resting  on  thick 
planks,  the  trunnions  touching,  the  vents 
stopped. 

71.  ^VIlat  additional  precaution  should  be 
observed  in  case  of  iron  pieces. 

They  should  be  covered  on  the  exterior 
with  a  lacker  impervious  to  water;  the  bore 
and  the  vent  should  be  greased  with  a  mix- 
ture of  oil  and  tallow,  or  of  tallow  and  beeswax 
melted  together,  and  boiled  to  expel  the 
water.  The  lacker  should  be  renewed  as 
often  as  necessary,  and  the  grease  at  least 
once  a  year.  The  laekor  and  grease  should 
be  applied  in  hot  weather.  The  cannon 
should  be  frequently  inspected,  to  see  that 
moisture  does  not  collect  in  the  bore. 


HAND-BOOK    OF   ARTILLERY. 


Part  I.     Section  II. 
ON  GUNS. 

1.  What  are  Guns  ? 

Long  cannon  without  chambers. 

2.  How  are  guns  denominated  ? 

By  the  weight  of  their  respective  shot. 

3.  What  are  the  principal  parts  of  a  gun  ? 
The  caseable,  breech,  reinforce,  chase,  and 

muzzle. 

4.  What  proportion  usually  exists  between 
the  length  and  calibre  of  a  gun  ? 

It  varies  from  15  to  23  calibres. 

5.  What  proportion  does  the  dispart  of  a 
gun  bear  generally  to  its  length  ? 

About  a  sixtieth  part  in  field  guns,  about 
a  thirtieth  part  in  sea-coast,  and  about  a 
thirty-eighth  part  *n  siege  and  garrison 
guns. 

6.  What  is  the  natural  angle  of  sight  in 
siege  and  garrison  guns  ? 

One  degree  and  thirty  minutes. 

7.  What  is  it  infield  guns  ? 

One  degree  in  all  except  the  new  12-pdr., 
in  which  it  is  one  degree  and  six  minutes. 

8.  Why  have  sea-coast  guns  no  natural  line 
of  sight  f 

Because  the  swell  of  the  muzzle  is  not 
visible  when  the  eye  is  on  a  level  with  the 
base-ring. 


GUNS.  29 

9.  Upon  what  are  guns  mounted  ? 

On  field,  siege,  barbette  or  casemate  car- 
riages. 

10.  What  projectiles  are  used  with  guns  ? 
Solid  shot,  spherical-case,  grape,  and  can- 
ister. 

11.  About  what  are  the  weights  of  the  differ- 
ent guns  ? 

6-pdr.,  884  lbs. ';  brass  12-pdr.,  1,757  lbs., 
new  pattern  1,220  lbs.;  iron  12-pdr.,  3,590 
lbs.;  18-pdr.,  4,913  lbs.;  24-pdr.,  5,790  lbs.; 
32-pdr.,  7,200  lbs.;  42-pdr.,  8,465  lbs. 

12.  Give  the  entire  length  of  the  several 
guns. 

6-pdr.  field  gun,  65.6  inches ;  13-pdr.  field 
gun,  85  inches,  new  pattern  72.15  inches; 
12-pdr.  iron  gun,  116  inches;  18-pdr.,  123.- 
25  inches ;  34-pdr.,  124  inches ;  32-pdi\, 
125.2  inches  ;  43-pdr.,  129  inches. 


30  HAND-BOOK    OF   ARTILLERY. 


Part  I.      Section  III. 
ON  HOWITZEKS. 

1.  What  is  a  Howitzer  ? 

A  chambered  piece,  of  larger  calibre  than 
a  gun  of  like  weight,  and  mounted  in  a  sim- 
ilar manner. 

2.  What  form  of  chamber  is  given  to  howit- 
zers ? 

That  of  a  cylinder. 

3.  How  is  it  united  with  the  large  cylinder 
of  the  bore  ? 

By  a  conical  surface,  except  in  the  8-inch 
siege  howitzer,  where  it  is  united  with  the 
cylinder  of  the  bore  by  a  spherical  surface, 
in  order  that  the  shell  may — when  neces- 
sary— be  inserted  without  a  sabot. 

4.  What  advantages  are  gained  by  the  em- 
ployment of  howitzers  ? 

They  project  larger  shells  than  the  guns 
with  which  they  are  associated,  are  well 
adapted  for  ricochet  fire,  the  destruction  of 
field-works,  breaking  down  palisades,  and 
setting  fire  to  buildings. 

5.  What  projectiles  are  used  with  howitzers? 
Shells,   usually;    spherical-case,   canister, 

grape  and  carcasses. 


•    . 


HOWITZERS.  31 

6.  Give  the  entire  length  of  the  several  how- 
itzers. 

Iron  10-inch,  124.25  inches;  8-inch  sea- 
coast,  109  inches;  8-inch  siege  and  garrison, 
61.5  inches;  2J:-pdr.  garrison,  69  inches; 
32-pdr.  field,  82  inches;  24-pdr.  field,  71.2 
inches;  12-pdr.  field,  58.6  inches;  mountain 
12-pdr.,  37.21  inches. 

7.  What  is  the  weight  of  a  howitzer  of  each 
kind? 

10-inch,  9,500  lbs. ;  8-inch  sea-coast,  5,740 
lbs.;  8-inch  siege  and  garrison,  2,614  lbs.  ; 
24-pdr.  garrison,  1,476  lbs.;  32-pdr.  field, 
1,920  lbs.;  24-pdr.  field,  1,318  lbs.;  12-pdr. 
field,  788  lbs. ;  12-pdr.  mountain,  220  lbs. 

8.  What  is  the  natural  angle  of  sight  in 
siege  and  garrison  and  field  howitzers  ? 

One  degree. 

9.  What  in  mountain  howitzers? 
Thirty-seven  minutes. 

10.  Why  have  sea-coast  howitzers  no  natural 
line  of  sight  ? 

Because  the  swell  of  the  muzzle  is  not 
visible  when  the  eye  is  on  a  level  with  the 
base-ring. 


32  HAND-BOOK    OF   ARTILLERY. 


Part  I.      Section  IV. 
OJST  COLUMBIADS. 

1.  What  is  a  Columbiad  ? 

A  gun  of  much  larger  calibre  than  the 
ordinary  gun,  used  for  throwing  solid  shot 
or  shells. 

2.  What  are  some  of  the  peculiarities  of  this 
gun  when  mounted  in  barbette  ? 

Its  carriage  gives  a  vertical  field  of  fire 
from  5°  depression  to  39°  elevation;  and  a 
horizontal  field  of  fire  of  360°. 

3:  Are  these  pieces  chambered? 

Those  of  the  old  pattern  have  chambers; 
but  they  are  now  made  without  any. 

4.  Give  the  weight  of  this  piece. 

Old  Pattern  10-inch,  15,400  lbs.;  8-inch, 
9,240  lbs.  New  Pattern  128-pdr.,  15,000 
lbs.;  64-pdr.,  9,100  lbs. 

5.  What  is  the  entire  length  of  this  gun  ? 
10-inch,  126  inches ;  8-inch,  124  inches ; 

128-pdr.,132.G  inches;  64-pdr.,  128.8  inches. 

6.  What  is  the  natural  angle  of  sight  in 
this  piece  ? 

8-inch,  1°  23';  10-inch,  1°  21';  128-pdr., 
2°  45';  64-pdr.,  2°  30'. 


MORTARS. 


Part  I.     Section  V. 
OK  MORTARS. 

1.  What  is  a  Mortar  ? 

The  shortest  piece  in  service;  the  trun- 
nions are  placed  in  rear  of  the  vent  at  the 
breech;  the  bore  is  very  large  in  proportion 
to  the  length,  and  is  provided  with  a  cham- 
ber. 

2.  What  are  the  principal  advantages  ob- 
tained by  the  employment  of  mortars  ? 

Reaching  objects  by  their  vertical  fire — 
such  as  a  town,  battery,  or  other  place — 
whose  destruction  or  injury  cannot  be  ef- 
fected by  director  ricochet  fire;  dismounting 
the  enemy's  artillery;  setting  fire  to  and 
overthrowing  works;  blowing  up  maga- 
zines; breaking  through  the  roofs  of  bar- 
racks, casemates,  etc.;  and  producing  havoc 
and  disorder  amongst  troops. 

3.  What  do  you  mean  by -vertical  fire  ? 
That  produced  by  firing  the  mortar  at  a 

high  elevation. 

4.  What  are  its  advantages  ? 

The  shell  having  attained  a  great  eleva- 
tion, descends  with  great  force  on  the  object, 
in  consequence  of  the  constant  action  of  the 
force  of  gravity  on  it. 

5.  Why  are  mortars  constructed  stronger  and 
shorter  than  other  pieces  ? 


o4  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

Because  greater  resistance  is  required  in 
consequence  of  the  high  elevation  under 
which  they  are  fired;  and  were  they  longer, 
the  difficulty  experienced  in  loading  them 
would  become  too  great. 

6.  Why  is  a  mortar  constructed  with  a  cham- 
ber f 

In  consequence  of  employing  various 
charges,  some  very  small,  it  becomes  neces- 
sary to  use  a  chamber  to  concentrate  the 
charge  as  much  as  possible,  so  that  the  shell 
may  be  acted  on  by  the  entire  expansive 
force  of  the  powder. 

7.  What  form  of  chamber  is  given  to  mor- 
tars f 

Usually  that  of  a  frustum  of  a  cone.  The 
bottom  is  hemispherical  in  the  sea-coast, 
stone  and  eprouvette  mortars.  In  siege 
mortars  it  is  a  plane  surface,  the  angles  of 
intersection  being  rounded  in  profile  by  arcs 
of  circles. 

8.  What  is  this  form  of  chamber  called  ? 
Gomer  Chamber. 

9.  What  is  the  advantage  of  the  conical  over 
the  cylindrical  chamber  ? 

Cylindrical  chambers  are  objectionable,  as 
the  projectile  is  frequently  broken  in  conse- 
quence of  the  small  surface  exposed  to  the 
action  of  the  charge.  This  defect  is  obviat- 
ed by  large  chambers,  and  particularly  by 
those  that  are  conical,  in  which  the  charge 
is  expended  upon  nearly  a  hemisphere. 

10.  What  form  of  chamber  has  the  eprou- 
vette ? 


MORTARS.  35 

That  of  a  cylinder,  it  being  the  only  mor- 
tar whose  chamber  is  of  this  shape. 

11.  How  are  mortars  mounted? 
On  beds  of  wood  or  iron. 

12.  What  is  the  object  of  mounting  mortars 
on  beds  in  preference  to  wheel-carriages  ? 

On  account  of  the  high  elevation  at  which 
they  are  usually  fired,  when  the  recoil,  in- 
stead of  forcing  the  piece  backward,  tends 
to  force  it  downward,  and  this  tendency  be- 
comes so  great  at  the  higher  angles  that  no 
wheel-carriage  could  long  sustain  the  shock. 

13.  What  is  the  entire  length  of  each  mortar  ? 
13-inch,  53  inches;  10-inch  sea-coast,  46 

inches;  10-inch  siege,  28  inches;  8-inch, 
32.5  inches;  stone-mortar,  31.55  inches;  Coe- 
horn,  16.32  inches. 

14.  What  are  the  iveights  of  mortars  ? 
13-in.,  11,500  lbs.;   10-in.  sea-coast,  5,775 

lbs;  10-in.  siege,  1,852  lbs.;  8-in.,  930  lbs.; 
stone-mortar,  1,500  lbs.;  Coehorn,  161  lbs.; 
eprouvette,  220  lbs. 

15.  What  are  the  tueights  of  the  different 
mortar-beds  ? 

8-in.  siege,  920  lbs.;  10-in.  siege,  1,830 
lbs.;  Coehorn,  132  lbs.;  eprouvette,  280  lbs. 

16.  What  are  the  diameters  of  the  bores  of 
the  stone,  Coehorn,  and  eprouvette  mortars  ? 

Stone-mortar,  16  inches;  Coehorn,  5.82 
inches;  eprouvette,  5,655  inches. 

17.  What  is  the  length  of  the  bore,  exclusive 
of  the  chamber,  of  the  different  mortars  ? 

18-in.,  26  inches;  10-in.  sea-coast,  *  25 
inches;    10-in.   siege,    15    inches;    8-in.,   12 


36  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

inches;  stone-mortar,  19.8  inches ;  Coehorn, 
8.82  inches;  eprouvette,  11.5  ftiehes. 

18.  What  is  the  length  of  the  chamber  of  the 
different  mortars  ? 

13-in.,  13  inches;  10-in.  sea-coast,  10 
inches;  10-in.  siege,  5  inches;  8-in.,  4  indi- 
es; stone-mortar,  6.75  inched;  Coehorn,  4.2") 
inches;  eprouvette,  1.35  inches. 

19.  For  what  is  the  eprouvette  used  ? 

For  determining  the  relative  strength  of 
gunpowder. 

20.  To  what  purpose  is  a  stone-mortar  ap- 
plied t 

To  throw  stones  a  short  distance,  from  150 
to  250  yards;  and  also  6-pr.  shells  from  50 
to  150  yards. 

21.  In  what  manner  are  the  stones  disposed 
in  this  mortar  ? 

They  are  put  into  a  basket  fitted  to  the 
bore,  and  placed  on  a  wooden  bottom  which 
covers  the  mouth  of  the  chamber. 

22.  What  use  is  'made  of  Coehorn  mortars  ? 
They  are  fired  either  from  behind  intrench- 

ments  like  other  mortars,  or  they  may  accom- 
pany troops  in  effecting  lodgments  in  towns 
and  fortified  places. 

23.  What  kind  of  projectiles  are  thrown  from 
mortars  f 

Shells,  fire-balls,  carcasses,  and  stones. 

24.  How  rapidly  may  siege  mortars  be  fired? 

At  the  rate  of  twelve  rounds  per  hour  con- 
tinuously; and  in  case  of  need,  with  greater 
rapidity. 


SEA-COAST   ARTILLERY.  37 


Part  I.    Section  VI. 
SEA-COAST   ARTILLERY. 

1.  Sow  are  Sea-coast  pieces  mounted?  ' 
On  barbette,  casemate,  flank-casemate,  and 

columbiad  carriages ;  and  the  carriage  upon 
which  the  mortar  is  mounted — called  its  bed. 
These  carriages  do  not  subserve  the  purpose 
of  transportation ;  the  barbette  carriage  may, 
however,  be  used  for  movingits  piece  for  short 
distances,  as  from  one  front  of  the  work  to 
another. 

2.  What  number  and  liind  of  pieces  are  re- 
quired for  the  armaments  of  forts  on  the  sea- 
board ? 

In  our  service  they  are  prescribed  by  the 
War  Department,  according  to  the  character 
and  extent  of  the  work. 

3.  What  disposition  should  be  made  of  heavy 
and  light  pieces  in  a  fortification  ? 

Heavy  pieces  should  be  employed  on  the 
salients  of  the  work,  or  for  enfilading  chan- 
nels where  a  long  range  is  required;  light 
pieces,  where  the  range  is  shorter. 


38  HAND-BOOK    OF  .  ARTILLERY. 

i 

Part  I.     Section  YIT. 
SIEGE    AETILLEEY. 

1.  Hoio  are  siege  guns  mounted? 
Usually  on  travelling  carriages,  with  lim- 
bers. 

2.  Of  what  number  and  kind  of  pieces  is  a 
siege  train  composed  ? 

This  must  altogether  depend  on  circum- 
stances; but  the  following  general  princi- 
ples may  be  observed  in  assigning  the  pro- 
portion of  different  kinds  and  calibres,  and 
the  relative  quantity  of  other  supplies  for  a 
train  of  100  pieces  : 

f  24-pdr.,  about  one  half  the 
Guns.  1      whole  number    ...         50 

(l8-pdr.  or  12-pdr.,  one-tenth         10 

Howitzers.     8-in.  siege,  one-fourth    .         25 

Mortars,     j  10-in.  siege,  one-eighth  .         12 

(    8-in.  siege      ...  S 

Stone  Mortars.       j£^$>)     '  5 


Coehorn  Mortars.  1    .  f     .  6 

(^  pieces,         j 

Wall  Pieces 40 

carriages. 
For  24-pdr.  guns,  and  8-in.  howitzers, 

one-fifth  spare  ....         90 

For  18-pdr.  and  12-pdr.  guns       .         .         12 
For  10-in.  mortars  and  stone-mortars, 

one-sixth  spare         ....         21 


SIEGE    ARTILLERY. 


39 


For  8-in.  mortars, 4 

Mortar-wagons,  1  for  each  10-in.  mortar 
and  bed,  for  each  stone-mortar  and 
bed,  and  for  three  8-in.  mortars  and 

beds, 19 

Wagons  for  transporting  implements,  in- 
trenching and  miners'  tools,  laborato- 
ry tools  and  utensils  and  other  stores, 
each  loaded  with  about  2,700  lbs.,  say  140 
Carts  (carrying  balls,  etc.,  on  the  march)     50 
Park  battery-ioagons,  fully  equipped,        .     28 
Park  forges,  "  8 

Sling-carts,  large,     . 
Do.         hand,     . 

DRAUGHT   HORSES. 

For    each    gun    and  howitzer,  with  its 

carriage, 
For  each  spare  gun-carriage, 

"         mortar-wagon, 

"         battery-wagon, 

"         forge,       .       #. 

"         cart, 

"         sling-cart,  large, 

"         spare  horses,    . 


6 
b' 
2 
2 
10 


Total,  about  1,900  horses. 

PROJECTILES  AND  AMMUNITION. 

Eound  shot,  800  to  each  24- 
pdr.,  1,000  to  each  18  and 
12-pdr. 

For  Guns,  -j  Grape  and  canister,  strapped, 
20  rounds  to  each  piece. 
Spherical-case,  strapped,  20  rds. 
to  each  piece. 


40 


HAND-BOOK    OF   ARTILLERY. 


For  Howitzers 


For  Mortars. 


r  Shells,  800  to  each  8-in. 
howitzer. 
Canisters,  strapped,  5  to 

each. 
Spher.  case,  strapped,  20 
to  each. 
(600  shells  to  each  10-inch. 
-2  800       "  "  8-inch. 

(200       «  "       Coehorn. 

Gunpowder,  in  barrels,  500,000  lbs. 
Computing  for  each  24-pdr.  round  shot,  one- 
third   the  weight   of 
shot. 
18    and    12-pdr.    round 
shot,   one-fourth   the 
weight  of  shot, 
grape,  canister  and  sph. 
case,    one -sixth    the 
weight  of  shot, 
round  of   howit- 


zer am  nition, 
5  lbs. 

round  lC-in.  mor- 
tar am'nition,  j>  g-jg 
7  lbs.  g-o 

round  8-in.  mor- 


tar am'nition, 


3  lbs.  J       "J 

round  Coehorn    mortar 

ammunition,  J  lb. 
round  stone-mortar  am- 
munition, 1  lb. 


3.   What  is  the  best  position  for  guns  in  order 
to  make  a  breach  ? 


SIEGE    ARTILLERY.  41 

On  the  glacis,  within  15  or  16  feet  of  its 
crest;  but  if  the  foot  of  the  revetment  can- 
not be  seen  from  thence,  the  guns  must  be 
placed  in  the  covered-way,  within  15  feet  of 
the  counterscarp. 

4.  In  what  manner  should  the  fire  of  siege 
guns  be  conducted  in  order  to  form  a  breach  ? 

1st.  Make  a  horizontal  section  the  length 
of  the  desired  breach  along  the  scarp,  at  one- 
third  its  height  from  the  bottom  of  the  ditch, 
and  to  a  depth  equal  to  the  thickness  of  the 
wall. 

2d.  Make  vertical  cuts  through  the  wall, 
not  farther  than  ten  yards  apart,  and  not 
exceeding  one  to  each  piece  of  ordnance,  be- 
ginning at  the  horizontal  section  and  ascend- 
ing gradually  to  the  top  of  the  wall. 

3d.  Fire  at  the  most  prominent  parts  of 
the  masonry  left  standing;  beginning  always 
at  the  bottom  and  gradually  approaching 
the  top. 

4th.  Fire  into  the  broken  mass  with  how- 
itzers until  the  breach  is  practicable. 

5.  Hoio  long  icould  it  take  to  make  a  breach 
of  20  yards  in  length? 

Breaches  of  more  than  20  yards  in  length 
have  been  opened  by  way  of  experiment, 
and  rendered  practicable  in  less  than  ten 
hours,  by  about  two  hundred  and  thirty  24- 
pdr.  balls  and  forty  shells,  in  one  case,  and 
by  three  hundred  18-pdr.  balls  and  forty 
shells,  in  another. 

6.  How  many  discharges  can  an  iron  gun 
sustain  ? 


42  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 


An  iron  gun  should  sustain  twelve  hun- 
dred* discharges,  at  the  rate  of  twelve  an 
hour;  but  whatever  may  be  the  rate  of  fire, 
it  is  deemed  unsafe  after  that  number  of  dis- 
charges. As  many  as  twenty  an  hour  have 
been  made  for  sixteen  consecutive  hours. 


*  Recent  experiments  at  Fort  Monroe,  Va.,  prove  this  to 
be  a  safe  estimate  of  the  number  of  discharges  an  iron  gun 
can  sustain,  as  two  new  model  10-in.  columbiads  have  been 
fired,  with  Charges  of  14  and  18  lbs.  of  powder,  nearly 
4,000  times  each.  One  of  these  pieces  was  cast  hollow  and 
the  other  solid,  under  the  direction  of  Captain  Rodman,  of 
the  Ordnance.  In  consequence  of  the  action  of  the  elastic 
force  of  the  gases,  due  to  the  combustion  of  the  powder,  in 
enlarging  the  vent,  the  pieces  have  had  new  vents  bored  in 
them  some  7  or  8  times. 


FIELD    GUNS    AND    BATTERIES.  43 


Part  I.     Section  YIII. 
ON    FIELD    GUJSTS   AND   BATTEEIES. 

1.  What  proportion  of  artillery  should  be  al- 
lotted to  an  army  in  the  field  ? 

The  proportion  of  artillery  to  other  troops 
varies  generally  between  the  limits  of  one 
and  three  pieces  to  1,000  men,  according  to 
the  strength  of  the  army,  the  character  of 
the  troops  composing  it,  the  strength  and 
character  of  the  enemy,  the  nature  of  the 
country  which  is  to  be  the  theatre  of  the 
war,  and  the  character  and  objects  of  the 
war. 

2.  What  regulates  the  selection  of  the  kinds 
of  artillery  and  the  proportion  of  the  different 
kinds  in  the  train  ? 

Similar  considerations  to  those  specified 
in  the  foregoing  answer.  The  following 
principles  may  be  observed  in  ordinary 
cases : 

r  o  n     i  •  i       (  x  are  1 2-pdrs. 

3  pieces  to  (  §  gUnS'  °f  whieh  \  |  "  6-pdrsl 
1,000  men.  |  ||    «   24ov32-pdrS. 

V3  If         12-pdrs. 

3.  What  is  afield  battery? 

A  certain  number  of  pieces  of  artillery  so 
equipped  as  to  be  available  for  attack  or  de- 
fence, and  capable  of  accompanying  cavalry 
or  infantry  in  all  their  movements  in  the 
field. 


44  HAND-BOOK   OF   ARTILLERY. 

4.  How  many  pieces  are  allotted  to  a  field 
battery  % 

Pour  guns  and  two  howitzers. 

5.  Are  oilfield  batteries  alike? 

No  ;  field  batteries  accompanying  infantry 
are  composed  of  the  heavier,  and  those  ac- 
companying cavalry  of  the  lighter  pieces — 
the  first  manned  by  foot-artillery,  and  the 
latter  by  horse-artillery. 

6.  In  what  respect  does  a  battery  of  horse- 
aftillery  differ  from  one  of  foot -art  ill  cry  ? 

The  main  difference  consists  in  the  can- 
noneers in  a  battery  of  horse-artillery  being 
mounted;  in  rapid  evolutions  of  foot-artil- 
lery they  are  conveyed  on  the  carriages. 

7.  What  is  the  composition  of  a  field  battery 
on  the  war  establishment  t 

KIND  OF  BATTERY.  12-PR.  6-PR. 

*%_•       (  12-pdrs.,  mounted 4 

(jUNS'  X    6-pdrs.,    "   «  4 

TT  (  24-pdrs.,  mounted  2 

HoWITZKKS-   1  12-pdrs.,       «  2-6         6 

r<  \  For  guns 8  4 

Caissons.  |  Fot  f owitzera 4  2_12        6 

Travelling  Forges 1       1 

Battery  Wagon 1       1 —  2         2 


Whole  No.  of  carnages  with  a  battery.  .  .      20       14 

f  Shot 560  560 

K    'For  4  guns  -  Spher.  case  ...  224  80 

(Canisters 112  160-896     800 

(Shells  ....168  120 

For  2  howitzers  ]  Sph.  case.  112  160 

(Canisters  .42  32-322     312 


o 


b  Total  No.  rounds  with  a  battery 1218  1112 


FIELD   GUNS   AND    BATTERIES.  45 

KIND    OF    BATTERY.                              12-PR.  6-PR. 

Draught  (  6  to  each  carriage.. 120  84 

Horses.    (  Spare  horses,  1-12 10  7 

Total 130  91 


-For  two  32-pdr.  howitzer  car-  f  Sheila 112 

riages  and  four  caissons,  the  number  of  \  Spher.  case.   84 


Note. 
ages  ai 
rounds  of  ammunition  is (Canisters...   14 

Total 210 

8.  What  is  the  composition  of  a  battery  of 
m  o  u  nt a  in  h  o  w  itzers  ? 

Howitzers      .         .         .         .         .         .         6 

Gun-carriages 7 

Ammunition-chests        ....       36 

(48  rounds  for  each  howitzer) 
Forge  and  tools,  in  2  chests      .         .         .1 
Set  of  carriage-makers'  tools  in  2  chests      1 
Pack-saddles  and  harness          .         .         .33 
Horses  or  mules 33 

9.  What  composes  the  Field-Park  ? 

The  spare  carriages,  reserved  supplies  of 
ammunition,  tools  and  materials  for  exten- 
sive repairs,  and  for  making  up  ammunition 
for  the  service  of  an  army  in  the  field,  form 
the  Field-Park,  to  which  should  be  attached 
also  the  batteries  of  reserve. 

10.  What  determines  the  quantity  of  such 
supplies  ? 

It  must  depend  in  a  great  measure  on  the 
particular  circumstances  of  the  campaign. 

11.  How  is  the  ammunition  which  cannot  be 
transported  by  the  batteries  carried? 

With  the  park;  in   caissons,  or  in   store- 


46  HAND-BOOK   OF   ARTILLERY. 

12.  Bo  any  other  carriages  and  stores  form 
part  of  the  Field-Park  ? 

Yes ;  spare  gun-carriages,  one  to  each  field 

battery. 

Travelling  Forqes)  n  „*       , 

t>   ..        tJt         j      y  one  or  more  of  each. 
mattery-  II  agons     j 

Sparc  spokes,  50  to  each  battery 
/Spare  fellies,  20  to  each  battery  ^  in  store- 
Spare  harness  }      in 

Horse  shoes  and  nails  j  boxes. 
Gunpowder,  saltpetre,  sulphur,  charcoal,  la- 
boratory-paper, cannon-primers  (percussion 
and  friction),  fuzes  and  plugs  for  field  ser- 
vice, stuff  for  cartridge-bags,  woollen  yarn, 
cotton  yarn,  glue. 

13.  Are  any  other  pieces  ever  used,  for  field 
service? 

Yes;  sometimes  the  12  and  18-pdr.  siege 
guns  and  the  8-in.  siege  howitzer. 

14.  For  what  particular  service  are  these 
different  pieces  most  suitable  ? 

The  siege  pieces  for  batteries  of  position; 
the  12-pdr.  battery  for  the  following  move- 
ments of  infantry,  and  the  6-pdr.  battery  for 
those  of  cavalry. 

Note. — These  siege  pieces  should  ho  placed  on  the  weak- 
est points  of  a  line,  and  on  heights  which  either  form  a  key 
to  the  position,  or  from  whence  the  greatest  and  longest 
continued  effect  may  be  produced. 

15.  What  are  the  peculiar  advantages  of 
Horse-Artillery  t 

Possessing,  from  their  lighter  construction 
and  mounted  detachments,  much  greater  lo- 
comotive powers  than  other  field  batteries, 


FIELD    GUNS   AND   BATTERIES.  47 

they  are  especially  adapted  for  following  the 
rapid  evolutions  of  cavalry,  for  sudden  at- 
tacks upon  particular  points,  and  for  sup- 
porting the  advance  or  covering  the  retreat 
of  an  army. 

16.  How  is  afield  gun  mounted? 

Upon  a  four-wheel  carriage,  which  answers 
for  its  transportation  as  well  as  for  its  service, 
similar  to  a  siege  carriage,  but  lighter,  and 
the  limber  carrying  an  ammunition-chest. 

17.  Where  should  a  battery  be  placed  before 
the  commencement  of  an  action  ? 

As  much  as  possible  under  cover,  by  tak- 
ing advantage  of  banks,  hollow-ways,  build- 
ings, woods,  etc. 

18.  Is  it  advisable  to  move  a  battery  at  once 
into  position  in  the  field? 

No;  but  if  unavoidable,  it  should  be 
masked  as  much  as  possible  until  ordered  to 
open  its  fire. 

19.  How  should  a  battery  be  masked  ? 

If  practicable,  by  covering  it  with  cavalry, 
in  preference  to  infantry,  as  the  former  does 
it  more  effectually,  and  is  sooner  moved  out 
of  the  way. 

20.  In  commencing  an  action,  how  should  the 
fire  of  a  battery  be  directed  ? 

When  the  enemy  is  in  line,  the  fire  should 
be  directed  over  the  whole  line  and  not  uj)on 
the  real  points  of  attack;  but  when  in  col- 
umn, ready  to  advance,  it  should  be  concen- 
trated upon  the  real  points  of  attack. 

21.  How  should  batteries  be  placed  in  rela- 
tion to  the  troops  with  which  they  are  acting  ? 


48  HAND-BOOK   OF   ARTILLERY. 

Upon  the  flanks  of  a  line,  but  :it  such  a 
distance  as  not  to  impede  its  movements, 
and  at  the  same  time  to  be  unfettered  in 
their  own  ;  the.  artillery  may  thus  represent 
the  faces  of  a  bastion,  and  the  line  of  troops 
the  curtain. 

'i'l.  Is  the  front  of  a  line  of  troops  an  advan- 
tageous position  for  afield  battery  f 

On  the  contrary,  it  is  the  worst  possible, 
as  offering  a  double  object  to  the  enemy's 
fire,  and  greatly  obstructing  the  movements 
of  the  troops;  while  a  position  in  rear  is 
nearly  as  bad,  as  the  fire  might  seriously  in- 
jure, or  at  least  greatly  disquiet  them. 

23.  In  supporting  an  attack,  what  precau- 
tions are  necessary? 

The  battery  should  be  carefully  kept  clear 
of  the  intended  line  of  march  of  our  own 
troops,  and  such  points  occupied  as  may 
afford  the  greatest  annoyance  to  the  enemy. 

24.  How  should  batteries  be  disposed  wit  It  re- 
gard to  the  enemy  s  troops? 

Generally  so  as  to  secure  a  cross-fire  on 
his  position,  and  on  all  the  ground  over 
which  he  moves  to  the  attack,  endeavoring 
to  take  him  at  all  times  in  the  direction  of 
his  greatest  dimensions:  that  is,  obliquely 
or  in  Hank  when  in  line,  and  in  front  when 
formed  in  columns.  Moderate  heights,  com- 
manding as  much  as  possible  the  surround- 
ing country,  should  always  be  taken  ad- 
vantage of,  but  not  such  as  may  prevent 
operations  in  advance  if  required. 

25.  Is  it  imperatively   necessary   to  confine 


FIELD    GUNS   AND   BATTERIES.  49 

positions  for  field  batteries  to  the  flanks  of  a 
line  ? 

When,  from  particular  circumstances,  the 
front  of  the  army  is  too  extended,  and  una- 
voidably divided  into  two  lines,  it  may 
become  necessary  to  place  one  or  more 
batteries  in  the  centre,  if  those  on  the 
flanks  are  unable  to  sweep  the  whole  front ; 
but  great  care  must  be  taken  not  to  impede 
the  advance  or  retreat  of  the  troops  when 
required. 

26.  Should  the  fire  of  field  batteries  be  car- 
ried on  at  the  same  uniform  rate? 

Certainly  not ;  the  destruction  of  the  en- 
emy being  the  object,  it  follows  that,  at 
distant  ranges,  a  greater  degree  of  care  is 
required  in  pointing  the  guns;  the  fire  is 
slow  and  steady,  and  increasing  in  rapidity 
as  the  enemy  advances,  without,  however, 
impairing  its  precision.. 

27.  Should  the  fire  of  field  batteries  be  car- 
ried on  in  salvoes  or  otherwise  ? 

Never  in  salvoes;  but  in  a  regular  man- 
ner, well  sustained,  and  with  distinct  in- 
tervals between  every  round,  commencing 
slowly,  and  increasing  in  rapidity  as  the 
range  diminishes. 

28.  Is  the  fire  of  batteries  more  efficacious 
when  dispersed  than  when  concentrated? 

The  effects  of  the  fire  will  be  in  propor- 
tion to  the  number  of  guns  brought  to- 
gether; and,  therefore,  in  order  to  strike 
a  decisive  blow,  this  should  at  once  be  done. 


50  HAND-BOOK    OF   ARTILLERY. 

29.  What  projectiles  are  used  with  field 
guns? 

Solid  shot,  spherical-case,  and  canister. 

30.  At  what  distaticc  from  the  enemy  should 
the  several  kinds  of  projectiles  be  employed  with 
field  battery  pieces  ? 

Solid  shot  from  350  yards  and  upward ; 
spherical-case  from  600  up  to  1,000  yards, 
although  it  may  be  used  within  the  first 
range ;  and  canister  within  350  yards,  or  up 
to  400  against  extended  formations. 

3.1.  What  number  of  rounds  can  be  fired  from 
a  field  gun  in  one  minute  ? 

Two  solid  shot  or  spherical-case,  or  three 
of  canister. 

32;  Why  are  more  rounds  of  canister  fired 
in  a  minute  than  of  solid  shot  or  spherical-case  f 

Because  the  latter  are  fired  at  greater 
distances  than  canister,  and  require  the 
piece  to  be  carefully  aimed,  thus  requiring 
more  time. 

33.  What  is  the  smallest  number  of  guns  that 
may  with  safety  be  employed  in  the  face  of  an 
enemy  ? 

Never  less  than  two,  in  order  to  secure  a 
continuous  fire  and  mutual  support. 

34.  Is  the  practice  of  employing  field  batteries 
against  those  of  the  enemy  recommended  ? 

Only  under  peculiar  circumstances;  as,  for 
instance,  when  his  troops  are  well  covered 
and  his  guns  exposed,  or  their  fire  very 
destructive. 

Their  fire  should  be  directed  principally 
against  columns  of  attack,  and  masses,  or 


FIELD    GUNS    AND    BATTERIES.  51 

upon   positions   which    are   intended   to  be 
carried. 

35.  In  what  time  could  a  battery  come  into 
action  in  the  field  ? 

It  could  come  into  action  and  fire  one 
round  in  25  seconds,  timing  from  the  order 
"action  front"  to  the  discharge  of  one  piece. 

36.  Suppose  cavalry  to  be  advancing  to  at- 
tack infantry,  and  first  observed,  at  the  distance 
of  a  mile,  passing  over  the  first  half  mile  at  a 
trot ;  the  next  quarter  of  a  mile  at  the  manoeuv- 
ring gallop,  and  the  remaining  distance  at  an 
increased  gallop,  terminating  with  the  charge  ; 
occupying  altogether  about  six  minutes :  during 
the  last  1,500  yards  of  their  advance  how  many 
rounds  per  piece  might  a  battery  fire  in  that 
time  ? 

Eleven  rounds  with  effect,  thus  : 

From  1500  to  650  yards 3'     32"— spherical-case. .  .7 

"        650  to  350 0'     48"— solid  shot 2 

"        350  to  close  quarters.  .0'     34" — canister 2 

37.  What  number  of  rounds  could  a  battery 
fire  against  infantry,  supposing  them  to  pass 
over  1,500  yards  in  about  16£  minutes? 

Thirty-six  rounds  -with  effect,  viz: 

From  1500  to  650.  .quick  step.  .9'    45" — spherical-case  .19 

650  to  350  "  3'    50"— solid  shot 7 

"        350  to  100  "  2'    30"— canister 8 

"        100  to  close  f      double  quick      \  Q,    .-.,, „ 

quarter?.    {   and  the  charge.   J 

38.  Should  the  enemy  attempt  to  force  the 
passage  of  a  river,  what  is  the  best  position  for 
artillery  to  oppose  it  ? 

Wherever  the   best  cross-fire  can  be  ob- 


52  HAND-BOOK   OF   ARTILLERY. 

taincd  in  order  to  obstruct  and  harass  him 
as  much  as  possible;  and  if  he  lias  suc- 
ceeded in  passing  over  any  portion  of  his 
troops,  it  should  be  directed  against  their 
formation. 

39.  When  the  enemy  is  making  the  passage 
of  a  river  in  retreat,  where  should  your  guns  be 
posted  ? 

In  such  a  position  as  to  bear  upon  the 
batteries  that  cover  the  retreat,  and  also 
upon  his  bridges. 

40.  In  forcing  the  passage  of  a  river,  what  is 
the  most  advantageous  position  for  artillery  f 

The  bridge  being  generally  laid  in  a  re- 
entering angle,  batteries  should  be  posted 
on  each  side  of  the  bridge,  and  far  enough 
from  it  to  secure  a  cross-fire  on  the  opposite 
bank. 

41.  Should  the  indiscriminate  expenditure  of 
ammunition  be  permitted  in  the  field  during 
action  ? 

Upon  no  account ;  ammunition  should  at 
all  times  be  careful ly  husbanded,  particu- 
larly at  the  commencement  of  an  action,  as 
the  want  of  it  at  the  close  may  decide  the 
fate  of  the  day ;  it  should  also  be  sparingly 
used  in  skirmishes  and  minor  affairs,  espe- 
cially when  at  a  distance  from  supplies,  or 
in  anticipation  of  a  general  action. 

42.  When  should  the  reserve  be  employed  ? 

When  a  particular  point  of  the  line  re- 
quires additional  support,  a  favorable  posi- 
tion is  to  be  seized,  an  impression  has  been 
made  on  the  line  by  the  enemy,  a  forward 


FIELD    GUNS   AND   BATTERIES.  53 

or  retrograde  movement  is  in  contempla- 
tion, or  when  a  determined  attack  is  to  be 
made  on  him,  then  the  reserve  should  come 
up  and  take  part  in  the  action;  and  it  is  of 
the  utmost  importance  that  this  should  be 
done  as  expeditiously  as  circumstances  will 
permit. 

4o.  Where  should  the  reserve  be  placed  pre- 
vious to  an  engagement  ? 

In  rear  with  the  second  line,  out  of  the 
range  of  shot,  and  as  little  exposed  as  cir- 
cumstances will  admit,  but  always  in  such  a 
position  as  to  have  ready  access  to  the  front 
or  rear. 

44.  Should  guns  be  lightly  abandoned  before 
an  enemy  ? 

Never  until  the  very  last  extremity. 
An  artillery-man  must  never  forget  that  his 
gun  is  his  proper  arm  ;  that  here  lies  his 
strength  ;  that  here  is  his  post  of  honor  and 
of  duty;  also,  that  the  last  discharges  are 
always  the  most  destructive,  and  may 
possibly  insure  the  safety  of  the  whole 
army,  or  turn  the  tide  of  victory  in  their 

FAVOR. 

45.  What  is  the  position  for  cavalry  when 
l,l,i.-  <d  in  support  of  a  battery  t 

On  its  flank,  about  the  distance  of  100 
yards,  and  as  much  concealed  as  possible. 

46.  What  is  the  proper  position  of  field  bat- 
teries when  infantry  squares  are  attacked  by 
cavalry? 

When  infantry  are  formed  in  squares  to 
resist  the  charge  of  cavalry,  the  guns  should 


54  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

be  placed  outside  at  the  angles  of  the  squares, 
the  limbers,  horses,  etc.,  inside  Should  the 
detachments  be  driven  from  their  guns,  they 
Avill  retire  into  the  square,  after  discharging 
their  pieces,  and  taking  with  them  the 
sponges  and  other  equipments;  the  moment 
the  enemy  has  retired,  they  recommence 
their  fire.  Supposing  the  infantry  formed  in 
echelon  of  regimental  squares,  and  that  the 
time,  or  small  extent  of  the  squares  would 
not  admit  of  the  limbers,  etc.,  being  placed 
inside,  then  the  wagons  and  limbers  should 
be  brought  up  with  their  broadsides  to  the 
front,  so  as  to  occupy,  if  possible,  the  space 
between  the  guns,  leaving  no  intervals  for 
the  cavalry  to  cut  through  :  the  prolonge  or 
drag-ropes  might  also  offer  an  effectual  mo- 
mentary impediment  to  them,  if  properly 
stretched  and  secured. 


i 


POINTING   GUNS   AND    HOWITZERS.  55 


Part  II.     Section  I. 
POINTING  GUNS  AND   HOWITZERS. 

1.  What  is  meant  by  the  term  pointing  a 
piece  ? 

To  point  a  piece,  is  to  give  it  such  a  di- 
rection and  elevation,  or  depression,  that 
the  shot  may  strike  the  object;  and  the  rule 
(except  in  case  of  mortars)  is:  First  give 
the  direction  and  then  the  elevation,  or  de- 
pression. 

2.  When  a  shot  is  fired  from  a  -piece,  by  how 
many  forces  is  it  acted  on  ? 

By  three. — 1st.  The  impulsive  force  of  the 
powder,  which  urges  it  forward. 

2d.  The  resistance  of  the  air,  which  tends 
to  stop  it. 

3d.  The  force  of  gravity,  which  causes  it 
to  descend. 

3.  Why  is  it  necessary  to  give  a  certain  de- 
gree of  elevation  to  a  piece  ? 

Because  a  shot  describes  under  the  action 
of  the  above  forces  a  curve  called  a  trajec- 
tory, which  is  situated  below  the  prolonga- 
tion of  the  axis  of  the  piece,  the  extent  of 
its  departure  from  this  line  increasing  with 
the  time  of  flight.  Therefore,  the  more  dis- 
tant the  object,  the  greater  must  be  the 
elevation  to  enable  the  shot  to  reach  it. 


56  HAND-BOOK   OF   ARTILLERY. 

4.  How  is  the  direction  given  to  a  gun  or 
tiowitzer? 

By  directing  the  line  of  metal  upon  the 
object. 

5.  How  is  the  elevation  or  depression  given  f 
The  elevation  or  depression,  which  de- 
pends upon  thi'  charge,  the  distance,  and  the 
position  of  the  object  above  or  below  the 
battery,  must  be  ascertained  from  tables,  or 
by  experiment,  and  the  proper  degree  given 
by  means  of  instruments. 

C.  When  will  the  object  he  struck  by  merely 
directing  the  line  of  metal  upon  it? 

But  in  one  case — when  it  is  at  point-blank 
distance. 

7.  How  must  the  line  of  metal  be  directed  for 
all  ranges  less  than  the  point-blank  range,  in 
order  to  strike  it  ? 

So  as  to  pass  below  the  object. 

8.  Give  a  simple  ride  for  firing  at  objects 
within  point-blank. 

Add  to  the  point-blank  range  the  differ- 
ence between  it  and  the  required  range,  set 
the  scale  to  the  elevation  corresponding  to 
this  sum,  as  shown  by  tables  of  tiring.  Then 
aim  the  gun  directly  at  the  object ;  now  ap- 
ply the  scale,  and  observe  where  the  visual 
ray  of  the  scale  strikes  the  ground,  and  hav- 
ing noted  this  point,  aim  the  gun  directly  at 

it. 

9.  How  must  the  line  of  metal  be  directed  for 
ranges  greater  than  the  point-blank  range,  in 
order  to  strike  it  ? 

Above  it. 


POINTING   GUNS   AND    HOWITZERS.  57 

10.  When  the  line  of  metal  passes  over  the 
object,  ivhat  instruments  must  be  employed  for 
giving  the  proper  elevation  ? 

The  gunner's  quadrant,  or  the  breech- 
sight. 

11.  How  is  the  quadrant  used  ? 

After  the  direction  has  been  given,  the 
quadrant  is  applied,  either  by  its  longer 
branch  to  the  face  of  the  piece,  or  this  branch 
is  run  into  the  bore  parallel  with  the  axis,  or 
it  may  be  applied  to  the  upper  surface  of  the 
lock-piece,  making  the  allowance  due  to  its 
inclination  with  the  axis  of  the  piece,  which 
ought  to  be  previously  determined,  and  the 
elevating-screw  turned,  or  the  quoin  adjust- 
ed, until  the  required  degree  is  indicated. 

12.  How  is  the  breech-sight  used  ? 

It  is  first  set  to  the  elevation  correspond- 
ing to  the  distance;  it  is  then  applied  to  the 
highest  point  of  metal  on  the  base-ring,  and 
by  the  ^elevating-screw,  or  quoin,  the  notch 
of  the  breech-sight,  the  highest  point  on  the 
swell  of  the  muzzle,  and  the  object,  are 
brought  in  the  same  line. 

13.  What  is  a  line  thus  determined  called  I 
An  artificial  line  of  sight. 

14.  In  the  absence  of  instruments,  how  may 
the  elevation  be  given  ? 

By  placing  one  or  more  fingers  of  the  left 
hand  upon  the  base-ring,  perpendicular  to 
the  axis,  and  using  them  as  a  breech-sight. 

Note. — In  practice,  it  is  well  to  fire  two  or  three  shots 
to  determine  the  range  experimentally,  as  it  is  affected  by 
divers  causes. 


58  HAND-BOOK    OF   ARTILLERY. 

15.  Should  the  line  of  metal  be  always  di- 
rected in  the  vertical  plane  gassing  through  the 
object  t 

No;  as  in  practice  there  are  circumstances 
(as,  for  instance,  a  strong  wind  blowing 
across  the  field  of  fire)  which  will  cause  a 
ball  to  deviate  from  this  plane,  it  follows 
that,  to  strike  the  object  in  such  a  case,  the 
line  of  metal  must  be  directed  to  its  right  or 
left — the  gunner  judging  of  the  distance  by 
observing  the  striking  of  the  shot. 

16.  7s  the  line  of  metal  a  permanent  line 
under  all  circumstances  ? 

K"o;  in  batteries  for  garrison  and  sea- 
coast  defence,  where  the  platforms  are  fixed, 
the  line  of  metal  may  be  considered  as  near- 
ly permanent;  but  with  siege  guns,  which 
are  mounted  on  travelling-carriages,  the 
wheels  of  which  are  liable  to  vary  in  posi- 
tion from  unevenness  of  ground,  or  unequal 
settling  in  newly-constructed  platforms,  this 
line  is  constantly  changing.  It  approxi- 
mates the  higher  wheel  in  proportion  to  the 
difference  of  level  between  the  wheels;  and 
hence,  to  secure  the  greatest  accuracy  of  fire, 
it  must  be  frequently  verified;  the  old  marks, 
if  not  found  correct,  should  be  erased  and 
new  ones  substituted. 

17.  When  the  notches  or  sights,  which  are 
sometimes  made  upon  the  base-ring  and  swell  of 
the  muzzle  in  field  guns,  for  aiming  the  piece, 
are  used,  how  is  the  error  of  direction  remedied 
when  the  wheels  are  not  in  the  same  level  ? 

The  piece  must  be  aimed  more  or  less  to 


POINTING    GUNS    AND    HOWITZERS.         59 

that  side  which  corresponds  to  the  higher 
wheel,  according  to  the  inclination. 

18.  When  the  elevation  or  depression  has 
once  been  ascertained  for  any  given  distance. 
how  may  the  firing  at  that  distance  be  facili- 
tated ? 

By  noting  some  point  on  the  elevating- 
screw  or  quoin;  adjusting  some  fixed  meas- 
urement from  a  point  on  the  stock  to  anoth- 
er point  on  the  under  side  of  the  breech  j  or 
by  a  chalk  mark  drawn  across  the  face  of  a 
trunnion  and  its  corresponding  cheek. 

19.  When  firing,  either  within  or  beyond 
point-blank  range,  may  remarkable  points  on 
the  ground  be  taken  advantage  of,  in  order  to 
furnish  an  object  to  aim  at  ? 

Yes;  some  fixed  object  may  often  present 
itself  which  will  serve  as  a  point  upon  which 
to  direct  the  line  of  metal.  No  means  should 
be  neglected  that  may  tend  to  secure  accu- 
racy of  aim;  for  the  shot  that  is  thrown 
away  by  carelessness  in  pointing  had  better 
not  be  thrown  at  all.     • 

20.  How  may  precision  of  fire  be  secured  at 
night  ? 

When  a  fixed  object  is  to  be  fired  at  by 
night,  the  piece  should  be  directed  during 
the  day,  and  two  narrow  and  well-dressed 
strips  of  wood  laid  on  the  inside  of  the 
wheels,  and  two  others  outside  of  the  trail 
of  a  siege  carriage,  and  nailed  or  screwed  to 
the  platform.  In  case  of  a  barbette  car- 
riage, the  traverse  wheels  should  be  chocked 
in   the   proper  position.     To   preserve   the 


60  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY,. 

elevation,  measure  the  height  of  the  [ele- 
vating-screw above  its  box,  or  take  the 
measure  between  a  point  on  the  gun  and 
another  on  the  stock;  cut  a  stick  to  this 
length,  and  adjust  the  gun  on  it  at  eachjfire. 

21.  Should  night  firing  with  guns  be  lim- 
ited ? 

Yrs;  it  should  be  limited  to  a  small  num- 
ber of  rounds,  as  it  consumes*  ammunition  to 
little  advantage. 


POINTING    MORTARS.  61 


Part  II.     Section  II. 
POINTING    MOETAKS. 

1.  What  is  the  rule  for  pointing  mortars  t 
First  give  the  elevation  and  then  the  di- 

rection. 

2.  How  is  the  elevation  given? 

By  applying  the  quadrant  to  the  face  of* 
the  piece  and  adjusting  the  quoin  until  the 
required  number  of  degrees  is  indicated. 

3.  Are  the  same  means  employed  for  giving 
mortars  their  direction  as  those  which  are  used 
ivith  guns  and  howitzers  ?  t 

No  ;  because  mortars  are  usually  masked 
from  the  object  to  be  struck  by  an  epaul- 
ment  or  parapet. 

4.  To  what  are  all  the  methods  employed  for 
giving  the  direction  to  mortars  reduced? 

To  determining  practically  two  fixed 
points,  which  shall  be  in  line  with  the  piece 
and  the  object,  and  sufficiently  near  to  be 
readily  distinguished  by  the  eye.  These 
points  being  covered  by  the  plummet,  deter- 
mine a  vertical  plane,  which,  when  including 
the  line  of  metal,  becomes  the  plane  of  fire. 

5.  What  is  the  simplest  manner  of  directing 
the  mortar  ? 

By  means  of  pointing -wires. 

6.  Describe  this  method. 

6 


62  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

The  two  fixed  points  required  arc  deter- 
mined by  planting  two  wires  upon  the  epaul- 
ment,  one  upon  its  crest  and  the  other  aoout 

a  yard  in  advance  of  it,  both  as  nearly  as 
possible  in  the  vertical  plane  passing  through 
the  centre  of  the  platform  and  the  object. 
The  points  being  thus  established,  the  direc- 
tion is  given  to  the  mortar  by  causing  a 
plummet,  held  in  rear  of  it,  to  cover  the 
wires  and  the  line  of  metal. 

7.  In  what  respects  is  this  method  defective  ? 
Both  in  accuracy  of  aim,  and  the  liability 

of  the  wires  being  deranged  by  the  shots  of 
the  enemy  or  by  other  causes. 

8.  Give  a  better  method  ? 

By  means  of  pointing -stakes,  by  which  one 
of  the  fixed  points  is  established  upon  the 
crest  of  the  parapet,  or  at  the  foot  of  the 
interior  slope,  and  another  in  rear  of  the 
piece.  Then,  by  a  cord  called  the  pointing- 
cord,  stretched  between  these  two  points, 
with  the  plummet  suspended  from  it,  a  ver- 
tical plane  is  determined,  with  which  the 
line  of  metal  is  made  to  coincide. 

9.  How  are  the  stakes  planted  ? 

A  stake,  a  foot  or  more  in  length,  is  driven 
into  the  crest  of  the  epaulment,  as  nearly  as 
practicable  in  the  vertical  plane  of  fire  pass- 
ing through  the  centre  of  the  platform,  sight- 
ing by  this  stake,  another  long  one  is  planted 
three  or  four  feet  in  front  of  it,  in  line  with 
the  object.  To  this  stake  the  cord  is  tempo- 
rarily attached,  and  stretched  by  the  first 
stake,  just  grazing   it,  to   a   point   on   the 


POINTING    MORTARS.  63 

ground,  one  yard  in  rear  of  the  platform. 
At  this  point  a  third  stake  is  driven.  The 
cord  is  removed  from  the  second  stake, 
which  may  now  be  taken  away,  and  perma- 
nently attached  to  the  first. 

10." How  is  the  mortar  directed? 

The  cord  is  stretched  to  the  rear  stake, 
and  as  near  the  muzzle-band  as  possible, 
with  the  left  hand,  while  the  plummet  is 
suspended  against  it  with  the  right ;  or  the 
plummet  maybe  attached  to  the  cord,  just 
in  rear  of  the  mortar.  The  line  of  metal  is 
then  brought  into  the  plane  of  these  two 
lines. 

11.  How  does  it  appeat  that  the  mortar  is 
thus  properly  directed  f 

Because  the  cord,  the  plummet,  and  the 
line  of  metal,  are  evidently  in  the  vertical 
plane  of  fire.  >. 

12.  What  is  done  in  case  the  shell  should 
strike  constantly  to  the  right  or  left  of  the  ob- 
ject ? 

The  pointing-cord  is  shifted  to  some  notch 
on  the  'pointing -board,  to  the  right  or  left, 
until  the  shell  falls  at  the  desired  point. 

13.  Describe  the  pointing -board. 

This  is  a  piece  of  wood,  one  foot  long,  two 
or  three  inches  wide,  and  one  inch  thick, 
having  a  notch  cut  in  the  middle  of  one 
side  to  fit  on  the  stake,  and  which  is  grad- 
uated into  equal  divisions  from  its  middle. 
When  not  in  use,  the  pointing-cord  may  be 
wound  on  it. 

14.  Describe  another  mode  of  planting  the 

POINTING-STAKES. 


64  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

The  mortar  being  placed  upon  the  middle 
of  the  platform,  the  gunner  mounts  upon  it, 
and  suspends  the  plummet  in  front  of  the 
muzzle,  covering  the  object.  Where  the 
plummet,  thus  suspended,  cuts  the  crest  of 
the  epaulment,  the  first  stake  is  driven.  A 
second  stake  is  then  driven  in  the  same  line 
between  the  mortar  and  the  epaulment. 
The  pointing-cord  being  attached  to  the  first 
stake  and  stretched  to  the  rear,  over  the 
point  where  the  plummet  touches  the  top  of 
the  mortar,  determines  the  point  on  the 
ground  at  which  the  rear  stake  is  driven. 
The  first  stake  is  then  removed,  and  the 
cord  attached  permanently  to  the  second 
stake. 

When  the  object  can  be  seen  from  the 
mortar,  owing  to  the  interposition  of  some 
obstacle,  as  a  parapet  or  a  hill,  two  persons 
in  sight  of  each  other,  one  of  whom  faces 
the  mortar  and  the  other  the  object,  must, 
by  successive  changes  of  position,  place 
themselves  in  the  vertical  plane  of  fire,  and 
at  the  points  thus  determined,  stakes  must 
be  driven,  one  of  which  will  serve  as  the 
object. 

15.  How  may  precision  of  fire  be  secured  at 
night  with  mortars  ? 

The  direction  is  preserved  by  nailing  or 
screwing  two  boards  to  the  platform  outside 
of  the  cheeks ;  the  elevation  is  marked  on 
the  quoin,  or  the  quoin  may  be  nailed  in  the 
proper  position. 


m       hi      i  *^B 

CHARGES.  65 


Part  III. 
CHAEGES. 

1.  What  is  the  charge  of  a  piece  of  artillery  ? 
The  powder  with  which  it  is  loaded. 

2.  What  is  the  ordinary  service  charge  of 
powder  for  heavy  guns? 

One-fourth  the  weight  of  the  shot. 

3.  What  is  it  for  firing  double  shot  ? 
One-si.rth  the  weight  of  one  shot. 

4.  What  is  the  breaching  charge? 
One-third  the  weight  of  the  shot. 

5.  What  kind  of  charges  are  used  in  hot.  shot 
firing  ? 

Small  charges,  from  one-fourth  to  one-sixth 
the  weight  of  the  ball.  , 

6.  For  what  reason  f 

Because  balls  fired  with  small  velocities 
split  the  wood  in  a  manner  which  is  favor- 
able to  its  burning ;  with  a  great  velocity 
the  hole  closes,  the  ball  sinks  deep,  and,  de- 
prived of  air,  chars  without  setting  fire  to 
the  surrounding  wood. 

7.  To  what  depth  should  hot  shot  penetrate  ? 
Not  deeper  than  ten  or  twelve  inches. 

8.  In  ricochet  firing,  what  kind  of  charges 
are  used  ? 

Light  charges  generally ;  varying  from 
two-thirds  to  one-eiglith  of  the  ordinary  charge. 


-^ 


66  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

9.  In  what  manner  are  the  charges  of  mor- 
tars regulated  ? 

The  charges  vary  with  the  elevation  ;  or, 
if  the  elevation  be  fixed  at  any  particular 
angle,  they  must  be  determined  by  the  range. 

10.  What  are  the  charges  for  field  guns  and 
field  howitzers  ? 

See  Table,  page  67. 

11.  What  are  the  charges  for  heavy  guns, 
columbiads  and  howitzers  f 

See  Table,  page  67. 

12.  What  are  the  greatest  charges  of  the 
sea-coast,  siege  and  Coehorn  mortars  ? 

See  Table,  page  67. 

13.  What  charge  is  used  for  projecting  fire- 
balls from  mortars  ? 

One  twenty-fifth  the  weight  of  the  ball. 


i 


CHARGES. 


67 


Charges  for  Field  Guns  and  Field  Howitzers. 


FOB  GUNS. 

FOR    HOWITZERS. 

KIND. 

d 

c 

£ 

£ 

b 

2 

5. 

g 

Pi 

£ 

a. 

Pi 

& 

& 

en 

eb 

C^ 

C* 

S 

For  shot 

For  spher.  case  or  canis- 
ter  

For  shells,  j  small  charge 
(large  charge 


Lbs. 
2.5 


1.5 


Lbs. 
1.25 


2.5 
2.5 
3.25 


1.75 
2. 

2.50 


Lbs.  I  Lbs. 


0.75  0.5 
1.  |  0.5 
1.      ,    0.5 


Charges  for  Heavy  Guns,  Columbiads,  and 
Howitzers. 


GUNS. 

COLUMBIADS. 

HOWITZERS. 

C 

u 
Pi 

sfc 

c. 

i 

I-H 

© 

l-H 

u 

J 

oo 

oc 
M 

5! 

SEA-COAST. 

1 

10-in.  j   S-in. 

Lbs. 
10.5 

Lbs. 
8. 

Lbs. 
8. 

Lbs. 
6. 

Lbs. 
4. 

Lbs. 
14. 

Lbs. 
8. 

Lbs. 
4. 

Lbs. 
2. 

Lbs.  1  Lbs. 
12.      |    8. 

Greatest  Charges  of  Sea-coast,   Siege,  and  Coehorn 
Mortars. 


STOXE-MORTAR. 


w   g 

.. 

1 

c 

a 

a 

A 

« 

PC3 
©  £ 

A 

6 

© 

00 

J. 

rl  «•- 

J2  " 

r-> 

<N 

Lbs. 

Lbs. 

Lbs. 

'  Lbs. 

Lbs.     ' 

Lbs. 

Lbs. 

20. 

10. 

4. 

2. 

0.5 

1.5 

1. 

HAND-BOOK   OF   ARTILLERY 


Part  IV: 
KANGES 


1.  What  is  meant  by  the  range  of  apiece  of 
artillery  ? 

The  distance  from  the  muzzle  to  the  first 
graze. 

2.  How  may  the  range  of  a  projectile  be  ex- 
tended f 

Either  by  raising  the  piece  to  a  higher 
level,  or  by  giving  its  axis  greater  elevation 
Within  certain  limits. 

3.  Define  point-blank  range. 

The  distance  from  the  muzzle  of  the  piece 
to  that  point  in  a  shot's  trajectory  where  it 
cuts  the  prolongation  of  the  natural  line  of 
sight  a  second  time. 

4.  In  what  does  the  French  definition  for 
point-blank  range  differ  from  ours  ? 

It  requires  that  the  natural  line  of  sight 
should  be  horizontal. 

5.  What  is  the  British  definition  for  point- 
blank  range ? 

The  distance  from  the  muzzle  to  the  first 
graze  when  the  axis  of  the  piece  is  parallel 
to  the  plane  upon  which  the  carriage  stands. 

6.  Explain  by  a  figure  Jhe  position  of  and 
relations  existing  between  the  line  of  sight,  the 


RANGES.  69 

line  of  fire  or  axis  of  the  piece,  and  the  trajec- 
tory, and  also,  what  the  point-blank  range  is. 

Fig.  1. 


ABcF,  the  line  passing  through  the  high- 
est points  of  the  base-ring  and  swell  of  the 
muzzle,  or  the  muzzle-hand,  is  called  the 
natural  line  of  sight.  EPcG,  is  the  axis  of 
the  piece  or  line  of  fire;  the  curved  line  FgD, 
described  by  the  projectile,  is  called  the 
trajectory,  and  is  entirely  below  the  line  of 
fire,  in  consequence  of  the  action  of  the 
force  of  gravity  giving  the  projectile  a  down- 
ward tendency.  The  point  _D  is  called  the 
point-blank,  and  its  distance  from  the  mouth 
of  the  piece  the  point-blank  range. 

7.  Mention  some  of  the  causes  which  vary  the 
point-blank  range. 

The  form  of  the  cannon  :  the  weight  or 
force  of  the  charge ;  the  diameter  and 
weight  of  the  projectile ;  and  the  inclina- 
tion of  the  line  of  sight  to  the  horizon. 

8.  Why  has  the  form  of  the  cannon  an  in- 
fluence on  the  point-blank  range? 

Because  as  the  difference  between  the 
diameter  of  the  breech  and  muzzle  becomes 
greater,  the  angle  of  sight,  BcP=GcF  (see 
fig.)  increases,  and  the  point-blank  D  is  re- 


70  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

moved  further  off;  on  the  contrary,  as  the 
diameters  approach  to  an  equality,  the  point- 
blank  approaches  the  piece.  Within  a  cer- 
tain angle,  or  when  there  is  no  angle  of 
sight, as  is  the  case  with  some  old  howitzers 
in  which  the  line  of  sight  is  parallel  to  the 
axis  of  the  bore,  there  will  be  no  point- 
blank,  as  the  trajectory  will  be  constantly 
below  the  line  of  sight. 

9.  What  influence  has  the  charge  on  the 
point-blank  range  ? 

An  increase  of  the  charge  determines  a 
more  distant  point-blank;  its  diminution 
produces  a  contrary  effect;  but  beyond  a 
charge  equal  to  one-third  the  weight  of  the 
ball,  the  increase  of  range  is  inconsiderable, 
and  the  force  of  the  recoil  becomes  very 
great. 

10.  How  does  the  diameter  and  weight  of  the 
projectile  affect  the  range? 

As  the  ball  increases  in  size  and  density, 
it  will  overcome  with  more  ease  the  resist- 
ance of  the  air. 

11.  Does  the  inclination  of  the  line  of  sight 
to  the  horizon  have  much  effect  on  the  point- 
blank  range ? 

Only  when  this  inclination  is  very  con- 
siderable. For  the  ordinary  inclination, 
from  0°  to  15°,  above  or  below  the  horizon, 
the  difference  may  be  wholly  neglected. 

12.  What  is  the  effect  on  the  point-blank 
range  of  firing  upward  under  a  large  angle  t 

The  action  of  the  weight  being  nearly 
directly  opposed  to  the  impulsive  force,  the 


■P9 

RANGES.  71 

trajectory  becomes  compressed  and  the  point- 
blank  distance  diminishes.  The  contrary 
effect  obtains  in  firing  downward  under  a 
similar  angle,  as  the  weight  and  the  force 
then  act  in  nearly  the  same  direction. 

13.  Why  may  the  point-blank  be  considered 
constant  for  the  same  calibre? 

The  dimensions,  charges,  and  weights  of 
projectiles,  being  constant,  and  the  inclina- 
tion of  the  natural  line  of  sight,  except  in  a 
very  few  cases,  being  comprised  between  0° 
and  15°,  it  follows  that  for  the  same  calibre, 
the  point-blank  may  be  considered  constant, 
and  may  serve  as  a  point  of  reference  in 
firing  at  different  distances. 

14.  What  is  the  extreme  range  of  a  piece  of 
artillery  ? 

The  distance  from  the  piece  to  where  the 
projectile  finally  rests. 

15.  For  a  given  velocity,  what  effect  has  an 
increase  of  the  angle  of  fire  on  the  range  ? 

It  increases  with  the  angle  of  fire  up  to  a 
certain  limit,  beyond  which,  it  diminishes. 

16.  What  angle  gives  the  greatest  range  in 
vacuo  ? 

Forty-five  degrees. 

17.  When  will  this  angle  give  the  maximum 
range  in  practice  ? 

Only  for  feeble  charges,  and  very  heavy 
projectiles. 

18.  How  is  the  angle  of  greatest  range  in 
practice  affected  by  a  change  in  the  velocity  and 
size  of  the  projectile  t 

It  seems  to  diminish  as  the  velocity  is  in- 


72  HAND-BOOK    OF   ARTILLERY. 

creased,  and  as  the  ball  is  reduced.  For  the 
musket  the  angle  of  maximum  range  varies 
from  28°  to  30° ;  and  is  nearly  42°  for  mor- 
tars. 

19.  Under  ichat  angle  is  a  mortar  usually 
fired  ? 

Under  the  constant  angle  of  45°,  and  the 
charge  is  varied  according  to  the  range  re- 
quired. 

20.  What  are  the  advantages  of  this  prac- 
tice f 

Economy  of  ammunition  )  the  recoil  being 
inconsiderable,  the  mortar  and  its  bed  re- 
ceive hjpt  little  strain;  the. ranges  are  more 
uniform,  and  the  effect  of  a  slight  error  in 
the  angle  of  fire  is  less  than  with  any  other. 

21.  Is  the  mortar  ever  fired  at  any  other 
angle  than  45°  ? 

Yes;  sometimes  at  60°. 

22.  When  is  the  mortar  fired  under  an  angle 
of  60°  ? 

When  the  battery  is  situated  very  near 
the  object  assailed,  and  it  is  desired  that  the 
shells  may  fall  upon  the  magazines  of  the 
besieged.  It  is  evident  that  projectiles  the 
higher  they  are  thrown  up  acquire  more 
velocity  in  falling,  besides  striking  the  ob- 
ject more  directly  and  with  increased  vio- 
lence. 

23.  Under  what  angle  are  stone-mortars 
usually  fired  ? 

Under  an  angle  of  60°,  and  sometimes  of 
75°;  that,  in  falling  from  a  great  height,  the 
stones  may  have  the  maximum  force  of  per- 
cussion. 


RANGES.  73 

24.  Under  what  angle  should  grenades  be 
thrown  from  stone-mortars  ? 

About  33°  •  otherwise  they  will  be  buried 
in  the  earth,  and  their  fragments  will  not  be 
sufficiently  destructive. 

25.  When  a  gun  or  howitzer  is  aimed  with 
the  line  of  metal  horizontal,  what  is  the  eleva- 
tion equal  to  ? 

The  natural  angle  of  sight  or  dispart. 

26.  How  is  the  time  of  flight  for  siege  mor- 
tars at  an  elevation  of  45°  determined  ? 

It  is  nearly  equal  to  the  square  root  of 
the  range  in  feet  divided  by  four. 


HAND-BOOK   OF   ARTILLERY. 


Ranges  of  Field  Guns  and  Hoivitzers. 


KIND  OF  PIECE. 

Pow 
der. 

Ball. 

Eleva- 
tion. 

Range 

REMARKS. 

lbs. 

0     / 

yards. 

6-Pdr. Field  Gun. 

1.25 

Shot. 

0 

318 

" 

1 

647 

P.  B.  Range. 

" 

2 
3 
4 
5 

867 
1138 
1256 
1523 

1. 

Sph.  case. 

2 

650 

Time  of  flight  2" 

" 

2  30 

840 

do.          3" 

" 

3 

1050 

do.          4" 

12-Pdr. Field  Gun. 

2.5 

Shot. 

0 

347 

" 

1 

662 

P.  B.  Range. 

" 

1  30 

785 

- 

« 

2 
3 

909 
1269 

« 

4 

1455 

<« 

5 

1663 

1.5 

Sph.  case. 

1 

670 

Time  2  seconds. 

" 

1  45 

950 

«     3      " 

" 

2  30 

1250 

"     4      " 

12-Pdr.  Field 

1. 

Shell. 

0 

195 

Howitzer. 

1 

1 
2 
3 
4 

539 
640 
847 
975 

0J5 

" 

5 

1072 

Sph.  case. 

2  15 

485 

Time  2  seconds. 

" 

3  15 

715 

«     3      " 

" 

3  45 

1050 

«     4      " 

24-Pdr.  Field 

2. 

Shell. 

0 

295 

Howitzer. 

M 

1 
2 

3 
4 
5 

516 
793 
976 
1272 
1322 

1.75 

Sph. case. 

2 

600 

Time  2  seconds. 

" 

3 

800 

<<     3      « 

" 

5  30 

1050 

"     4      " 

2. 

" 

3  30 

880 

«     3      " 

32-Pdr.  Field 

2.5 

Shell. 

0 

290 

Howitzer. 

" 

1 

531 

« 

2 
3 
4 

779 
1029 
1203 

u 

5 

1504 

2.5 

Sph.  case. 

3 

800 

Time  2%  seconds 

RANGES. 


75 


Ranges  of  Field  Guns  and  Hoivitzers — Continued. 

KIND  OF  PIECE. 

Pow- 
der. 

Ball. 

Eleva- 
tion. 

Range 

REMARKS. 

lbs. 

O      1 

yds. 

Mountain  Howitzer. 

0.5 

Shell. 

0 

170 

1 
2 

300 

392 

2  30 
8 

500 

637 

Time  2  sec. 

K 

4 

785 

Time  3  sec. 

K 

5 

1005 

0.5 

Sph. case. 

0 

150 

" 

2  30 

450 

Time  2  sec. 

« 

3 

500 

« 

4 

700 

Time  2%  sec 

" 

4  30 

800 

Time  3  sec. 

0.5 

Canister. 

4  to  5° 

250 

Ranges  of  Heavy  Artillery. 


KIND  OF  PIECE. 

Pow- 
der. 

Ball. 

Eleva- 
tion. 

Range 

REMARKS. 

18-Pdr.Siege  and  Gar- 
rison Gun  on  Bar- 
bette Carriage. 

lbs. 
4.5 

Shot. 

0  / 
1 

1  30 
2 

3 
4 
5 

yds. 

641 

800 

950 

1256 

1450 

1592 

Point-Blank 

24-Pdr.Siege  and  Gar- 
rison Gun  on  Siege 
Carriage. 

6. 

8. 

Shot. 

M 

0 

1 

1  30 

2 

3 

4 

5 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

412 

842 

953 

1147 

1417 

1666 

1901 

883 

1170 

1454 

1639 

1834 

Point-Blank 

32-Pdr.  Sea-coast  Gun 
on  Barbette  Carriage. 

6. 

8. 

10.67 

Shot. 

1  45 
1 

1  30 
1  35 
o 

3 
4 
5 
1 
2 
3 

900 

713 

800 

900 

1100 

1433 

1684 

1922 

780 

1155 

1517 

76 


HAND-BOOK    OF   ARTILLERY. 


Ranges  of  Heavy  Artillery — Continued. 


KIND  OF  PIECE. 

P-.W- 

der. 

Ball. 

Eleva- 
tion. 

Range 

REMARKS. 

lbs. 

o   / 

yds. 

42-Pdr.  Sea-coast  Gun 

10.5 

Shot. 

1 

775 

on  Barbette  Carriage. 

u 

1  30 
2 

860 
1010 

« 

3 
4 
5 

1300 
1600 
1955 

14. 

;; 

1 
2 
3 

770 
1128 
13v0 

" 

4 

1687 

" 

5 

1915 

8-in.  Siege  Howitzer 

4. 

45-lb.  Shell 

0 

251 

Time  %  sec. 

on  Siege  Carriage. 

" 

1 

435 

" 

2 

618 

u   2      « 

u 

3 

720 

«  3      « 

" 

4 

992 

«  4      « 

" 

5 

1241 

«  5       " 

" 

12  30 

2280 

24-Pdr.Iron  Howitzer 

2. 

17-lb.  Shell 

0 

295 

on  a  Flank -Case- 

" 

1 

516 

mate  Carriage. 

" 

5 

1322 

T% 

Sph.  case. 

2 

600 

Time  2  sec. 

« 

5  30 

1050 

"     4    •' 

2. 

" 

3  30 

880 

•'     3    « 

8-in.  Sea-coast  How- 

4. 

45-lb.  Shell 

1 

405 

itzer  on  a  Barbette 

« 

2 

652 

Carriage. 

„ 

3 

4 
5 

875 
1110 
1300 

6. 

" 

1 

2 
3 
4 
5 

572 

828 

947 

1168 

1463 

8. 

; 

1 

3 
4 
5 

646 
909 
1190 
1532 
1800 

10-in.  Sea-coast  How- 

12. 

90-lb.  Shell 

1 

580 

itzer  on  a  Barbette 

« 

2 

891 

Time  3   sec. 

Carriage. 

" 

3 

1185 

»     4      H 

ci 

3  30 

1300 

» 

4 

1426 

«     5^" 

" 

5 

1650 

U         Q         « 

RANGES. 


77 


Ranges  of  Heavy  Artillery — Continued. 


KIND  OF_>IECE. 

Pow- 
der. 

Ball. 

Eleva- 
tion. 

Range 

REMARKS. 

lbs. 

o  / 

yds. 

8-in.  Columbiad  on 

10. 

65-lb.  sbot 

1 

'  932 

Axis  of  gun  16 

Barbette  Carriage 

" 

2 

1116 

feet      above 

" 

3 

140-2 

the  water. 

« 

4 

1608 

" 

5 

1S47 

« 

6 

•JUKI 

a 

8 

2397 

Shot  ceased  to 

« 

10 

3834 

ricochet    on 

a 

15 
20 
25 

3583 
4322 
4875 

the  water. 

" 

27 

44S1 

15. 

M 

27  30 

4812 

10. 

50-lbl  shell 

1 

2 

919 
1209 

M 

3 
4 
5 

1409 
1697 
1813 

(1 

6 

1985 

> 

« 

8 
10 

2203 
2657 

U 

15 
20 
25 
27 

3556 
3716 
4387 
4171 

15. 

" 

27  30 

4468 

10-incli   Columbiad 

18. 

128-lb.  sht. 

0 

394 

Axis  of  gun  16 

on  Barbette  Car- 

" 

1 

752 

feet     above 

riage. 

" 

2 

1002 

the  water. 

« 

3 
4 

5 

1230 
1570 

1814 

m 

6 

2037 

Shot  ceased  to 

" 

8 

2519 

ricochet    on 

" 

10 
15 
20 
25 
30 
35 

2777 
3525 
4020 
4304 
4761 
5433 

the  water. 

20. 

" 

39  15 

5654 

12. 

100-lb.sbll 

1 

800 

% 

2 

1012 

<» 

3 

1184 

K 

4 

1443 

"          f    5 

1604 

18. 

"          1 

0 

448 

78 


HAND-BOOK   OF   ARTILLERY. 


Ranges  of  Heavy  Artillery — Continued. 


KIND   OF   PIECE. 

Pow- 
der. 

Hall. 

Eleva- 
tion. 

Range 

KEMARK8. 

lbs. 

o   / 

yds. 

10-inch   Columbiad 

18. 

100-lb.shll 

1 

747 

on  Barbette  Car- 

V 

2 

1100 

riage — Contiita'd 

« 

3 

1239 

j 

4 
5 
6 
8 
10 
15 
20 
25 
30 

1611 
1865 
3209 

2489 
284S 
3200 
3885 
4150 
4651 

" 

35 

4828 

Tinie35sec'ds. 

13-in.  Bea-C't  Mort. 

20. 

200-lb.  sbll 

45 

4325 

Tinie40sec'ds. 

10-in.  Sea-Ct  Mort. 

10. 

98-lb.  shell 

45 

4250 

Time  36  sec'ds. 

10-iu.  Siege  Mortar 

1. 

90-lb.  shell 

45 

300 

Time  6.5  sec. 

1.5 

« 

« 

700 

«    12.       •' 

2. 

« 

u 

1000 

"    14.      " 

2.5 

« 

« 

1300 

"    16.      " 

3. 

" 

" 

1600 

"    18.      « 

3.5 

" 

" 

1800 

"    19.      " 

4. 

" 

2100 

"    21.       " 

lbs.oz. 

8-in.  Siege  Mortar. 

0     8 

45-lb.  shell 

45 

209 

Time  6.75. sec. 

0  VI 

" 

" 

876 

-      9.      " 

1    0 

" 

« 

650 

"     11.5    « 

1    4 

« 

« 

943 

'•     14.      " 

1    8 

« 

« 

1318 

"    16.5     <* 

1  12 

" 

<i 

1522 

"    18.5     « 

2    0 

" 

u 

1837 

«    20.5    « 

oz. 

24-pound'r  Coehorn 

0.5 

17-lb.  shell 

45 

25 

Mortar. 

1. 

1.5 

1.75 

2. 

2.75 

4. 

6. 

< 

I 

68 
104 
143 
165 
260 
422 
900 

8. 

" 

" 

1200 

lbs. 

Stones. 

(150 

Stono-Mortar. 

1.5 

120  lbs. 

60 

i    to 

^250 

H 

15  6-pdr. 

J33 

50 

Fuze  15  sec'ds. 

shells. 

to  150 

Note. — Fire-balls,  according  to  their  size,  are  fired  from  mortars 
of  corresponding  calibres.  With  a  charge  of  one  twenty-fifth  its 
weight,  the  ball  is  thrown  600  to  700  yards. 


RICOCHET.  79 


Part  V. 
E1COCHET. 

1.  What  is  understood  by  ricochet  firing  ? 
That  obtained  by  firing  a  piece  at  very 

small  angles  of  elevation,  by  which  means 
the  projectile  which  falls  on  ground  of  ordi- 
nary firmness  at  an  angle  not  greater  than 
10°,  or  upon  water  at  4°  or  5°,  will  make 
one  or  more  bounds.  In  this  case  the  pro- 
jectile is  said  to  ricochet. 

2.  What  is  the  object  of  ricochet  firing  f 

To  enfilade  a  face  of  the  enemy's  work, 
which  is  effected  by  causing  a  projectile  to 
bound  along  the  terreplein  of  the  face,  with 
the  view  of  annoying  his  cannoneers,  and 
dismounting  his  pieces.  It  is  employed  also 
in  harassing  an  enemy,  when  formed  or  in 
the  act  of  forming  behind  a  rising  ground 
or  other  obstacle,  taking  post  in  a  wood, 
etc.,  and  in  enfilading  a  line  of  troops. 

3.  What  are  the  peculiar  ^advantages  of  this 
fire? 

In  being  able  to  reach  objects  which  can- 
not be  reached  by  direct  fire,  on  account  of 
intervening  obstacles. 

4.  In  enfiladin'g  a  face  of  an  enemy's  work, 
what  is  the  object  to  be  fired  at  ? 

Usually  some  point  of  the  interior  crest 


80  HAND-BOOK    OF   ARTILLERY. 

of  the  parapet  which  covers  a  flank  of  the 
terreplein  to  be  reached. 

5.  What  is  the  point  of  fall  ? 

The  point  of  the  terreplein  which  is  first 
struck  by  the  projectile  after  having  grazed 
the  interior  <  rest. 

6.  What  is  the  angle  of  fall? 

It  is  the  angle  made  at  the  point  of  fall 
by  the  tangent  to  the  trajectory  with  a 
horizontal  line  in  the  plane  of  fire. 

7.  How  does  the  angle  of  fall  compare  with 

that  Of  ELEVATION? 

It  is  greater. 

8.  Upon  what  do  the  charge  and  elevation 
depend  ? 

Upon  the  distance  of  the  object  from  the 
battery;  upon  the  difference  of  level  be- 
tween these  points ;  the  distance  of  the 
desired  point  of  fall  from  the  parapet;  the 
height  of  the  parapet,  etc. 

9.  If  the  embrasure  be  such  that  the  object  is 
masked,  how  is  the  piece  pointed  ? 

The  direction  must  be  given,  as  with  the 
mortar,  by  the  plummet;  this  is  held  by 
the  person  who  points,  in  such  a  manner  as 
to  cover  both  the  line  of  metal  and  the 
object.  The  elevation  is  then  given  by  the 
quadrant. 

10.  What  is  the  maximum  angle  of  elevation 
in  ricochet  firing  ? 

Against  troops,  it  should  seldom  exceed 
3°  above  the  surface  of  the  ground  occupied 
by  them.  Against  fortresses,  forts,  and  for- 
tified lines,  it  varies  from  3°  to  9°  above  the 
horizontal. 


RICOCHET.  81 

11.  At  what  distance  from  the  object  should 
the  ricochet  battery  be  placed  ? 

Never  at  a  greater  distance  than  600 
yards. 

12.  In  enfilading  a  work,  how  should  the 
ricochet  firing  be  conducted  ? 

The  projectile  should  be  made  to  graze 
the  parapet  while  in  the  descending  branch 
of  the  trajectory;  and  this  must  be  effected 
by  regulating  the  charges  and  elevating  or 
depressing  the  piece  until  the  shot  is  seen 
to  fall  just  over  the  interior  crest  of  the 
parapet.  Light  charges  are  generally  used, 
varying  from  two-thirds  to  one-eighth  of  the 
ordinary  charge. 

13.  What  pieces  are  best  adapted  for  ricochet 
fire? 

Those  which  throw  heavy  shells ;  for,  if 
used  to  enfilade  a  work,  the  shells  lodge  and 
explode  in  the  traverses,  and  render  the 
guns  more  liable  to  be  dismounted  and  their 
detachments  put  hors  de  combat. 

14.  What  determines  the  nature  of  the  rico- 
chet ? 

The  angle  of  fall :  it  is  flattened  when  this 
angle  does  not  exceed  6°,  and  curvated  when 
it  is  between  10°  and  12°.  In  the  first  of 
these  fires,  the  velocities  are  great,  and  in 
the  second  small. 

15.  What  are  the  charges  for  a  flattened 
ricochet  for  siege  guns  at  an  angle  of  about 
3°? 

See  Table,  page  83. 

16.  What  are  the  charges  for  a  flattened 


82  HAND-BOOK    OF   ARTILLERY. 

ricochet  for  siege  howitzers  at  an  angle  of 
about  3°  ? 

See  Table,  page  83. 

17.  What  are  the  charges  for  a  curvated 
ricochet  for  a  siege  howitzer  at  an  angle  of 
about  10°? 

See  Table,  page  83. 


RICOCHET. 


83 


Charges  for  a  Flattened  Riochet  for  Siege  Guns. 


.  DISTANCE. 

ELEVATION. 

CHARGE. 

660 

yards. 

2° 

45' 

1 

weight  of  ball. 

555 

it 

3° 

1 

a 

a 

440 

a 

3° 

15' 

Vo 

u 

a 

333 

a 

3° 

35' 

i 

30 

It 

tc 

Charges  for  a  Flattened  Ricochet  for  Siege  Howitzers. 


DISTANCE. 

ELEVATION. 

CHARGE. 

550  yards. 
440       « 
330       " 
320      " 

1°  45' 

2°  15' 
2°  15' 
1°45' 

3  lbs. 

2  lbs.  3  oz. 
1  lb.  12  oz. 
1  lb.  2  oz. 

Charges  for  a  Curvated  Ricochet  for  Siege  Howitzers. 


ELEVATION. 


550 
440 

yards. 

330 
220 

u 

7°  30' 


1  lb.  4 

oz. 

1  lb.  1 

oz. 

14 

oz. 

10 

oz. 

The  height  of  the 
object  above  the  level 
of  the  battery  being 
supposed  to  be  20  ft. 


84  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 


Part  VI. 
EEC  OIL  . 

1.  What  is  meant  by  the  recoil  of  a  piece 
of  artillery? 

The  retrograde  motion  impressed  upon 
cannon  by  the  discharge  is  termed  the  recoil. 

2.  What  causes  the  recoil  of  a  piece  ? 

The  gas  produced  by  the  ignition  of  the 
charge  in  the  bore,  expanding  with  equal 
force  in  every  direction,  finds  only  two  ways 
of  escape  (the  muzzle  and  vent);  the  pres- 
sure upon  these  points  will  therefore  cease, 
while  it  will  be  proportionally  increased 
upon  the  parts  directly  opposite,  that  is,  the 
breech  and  the  lower  part  of  the  first  rein- 
force, producing  in  the  first  case  the  recoil, 
and  in  the  other,  indirectly,  the  dipping  of 
the  muzzle. 

3.  Mow  far  does  a  gun  usually  recoil? 
This   depends  entirely   upon    the  nature 

and  inclination  of  the  ground  upon  which 
the  carriage  stands,  the  situation  of  the 
trunnions,  angle  of  elevation,  comparative 
weight  of  the  gun  and  carriage,  and  upon 
the  strength  of  the  charge. 

4.  What  proportion  does  the  velocity  of  the 
recoil  of  a  piece  bear  to  that  of  a  ball  ? 

Inversely  as  their  weights,  or  masses. 


RECOIL.  85 

5.  What  proportion  exists  between  the  pres- 
sure acting  upon  the  part  of  the  bore  of  a  piece 
directly  opposite  the  vent,  and  that  which  occa- 
sions the  recoil  ? 

As  the  square  of  the  diameter  of  the  vent 
is  to  the  square  of  that  of  the  shot. 

6.  Has  the  recoil  any  effect  upon  the  flight  of 
the  projectile  ? 

No  appreciable  effect,  the  shot  being  ex- 
pelled from  the  gun  before  it  has  recoiled  a 
fraction  of  an  inch. 

7.  What  are  the  'principal  inconveniences 
arising  from  the  recoil  of  guns  f 

The  necessity  of  running  up  the  gun  after 
every  discharge,  and  consequent  fatigue  to 
the  men  and  loss  of  time ;  it  also  necessitates 
that  a  greater  breadth  should  be  given  to 
the  terreplein  of  a  work. 

8.  What  causes  the  muzzle  of  a  piece  of  ar- 
tillery to  dip  when  fired  ? 

The  sudden  pressure  of  the  gas  acting 
upon  the  portion  of  the  first  reinforce  oj)po- 
site  to  the  vent,  causes  the  piece  to  strike 
downward  upon  the  elevating  screw  or  quoin, 
and  the  reaction  to  make  the  muzzle  dip. 

9.  What  influence  has  the  position  of  the 
axis  of  the  trunnions  in  respect  to  that  of  the 
bore  upon  the  recoil  ? 

If  the  axis  of  the  trunnions  be  below  that 
of  the  piece,  the  pressure  of  the  breech  upon 
the  carriage  will  increase  as  the  distance 
between  the  axis  increases;  and  from  this 
pressure  there  will  arise  a  friction  upon  the 
ground  which  will  diminish  the  recoil.  On 
8 


86  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

the  contrary,  if  the  axis  of  tbe  trunnions  be 
above  that  of  the  piece,  the  breech  will  have 
an  upward  tendency,  the  recoil  will  bo  in- 
creased, but   the  carriage,  and   particularly 

the  axle-tree,  will  be  subjected  to  less  strain. 
Hence,  the  recoil  will  be  transmitted  direct- 
ly to  the  trunnions,  if  their  axis  (as  in  our 
service)  be  situated  in  the  same  plane  with 
the  axis  of  the  piece.  The  size  of  the  trun- 
nions is  made  proportional  to  the  force  of 
the  recoil. 

10.  Does  the  position  of  the  trunnions  with 
reference  to  the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  piece  in- 
fluence the  recoil  t 

Yes  j  in  cannon  fired  horizontally,  or  un- 
der very  small  angles,  the  portion  in  rear  of 
the  trunnions  is  heavier  than  that  in  front; 
an  arrangement  which  increases  the  pres- 
sure of  t|ie  trail  on  the  ground  so  as  to 
diminish  the  recoil.  But  in  pieces  fired 
under  large  angles,  the  trunnions  are  placed 
in  rear  of  the  centre  of  gravity,  for  the  pur- 
pose of  increasing  the  ease  of  pointing. 


WINDAGE.  87 


Part  VII. 
WINDAGE. 

1.  Wliat  is  meant  by  windage  ? 

The  difference  between  the  diameter  of 
the  projectile  and  that  of  the  bore. 

2.  7s  it  absolutely  necessary  to  allow  wind- 
age? 

Yes,  in  order  to  make  an  allowance  for  a 
piece  becoming  foul,  the  expansion  of  shot 
by  heat,  the  incrustation  of  rust,  and  for  the 
tin  straps  of  fixed  ammunition. 

3.  What  advantages  are  derived  from  reduc- 
ing the  windage? 

An  increase  in  the  accuracy  of  fire;  a 
more  extensive  range,  or  an  equal  range 
with  a  smaller  charge,  as  there  is  less  loss  of 
gas;  and  less  injury  to  the  surface  of  the 
bore. 

4.  Why  should  the  bore  suffer  less  injury  by 
a  diminution  of  the  windage? 

Because  in  proportion  to  the  decrease  of 
windage  there  will  be  less  space  for  the  re- 
flections of  the  shot  along  the  bore,  and 
consequently  less  injurious  power  exercised 
upon  it. 

5.  What  is  the  loss  of  velocity  by  a  given 
windage  proportional  to  ? 

It  is  directly  as  the  windage,  and  inverse- 
ly as  the  diameter  of  the  bore  very  nearly. 


88 


HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 


6.    What  is  the  loss  of  velocity  by  the  wind- 
age of  the  ball  ? 


KIND   OF   SUN. 


22-pdr.  Sea-Coast. 


12-pdr.  25  calibres. 


24-pdr.  Siege j 


12-pdr.  Field,  16  cali- J 
bres "j 


6-pdr.  Field. 


is 

Initial  velocity 

& 

of  ball. 

o 

With 

u  z 

Without 

windage 

3    ~ 

3 

windage 

ofl-40th 

5 

diam. 

lbs. 

feet. 

feet. 

4 

1444 

1271 

4 

1600 

1433 

6 

1890 

1723 

2 

1617 

1444 

3 

1915 

1742 

4 

2124 

1951 

2 

1528 

1370 

3 

1793 

1635 

4 
1.5 

1992 

1834 

1734 

1560 

Loss  of  velocity 

by 

windage 

of 

l-40th  diam. 


feet. 
173 


167 
167 


173 
173 
173 


158 
158 
158 


174 


pr.  cent. 
12 


11 


7.   What  windage  is  allowed  to  guns? 


IRON. 

BRASS. 

Sea-eoast. 

Siege  and  Garrison. 

Field. 

42 

32 

24 

18 

12 

12 

inches. 
0.10 

6 

inches. 
0.16 

inches. 

0.15 

inches. 
0.14 

inches. 
0.13 

inches. 
0.10 

inches. 
0.9 

WINDAGE. 


89 


8.   What  \oindage  is  allowed  to  columbiads 
and  howitzers  ? 


Columbiads. 


Howitzers. 


Sea-Coast. 


Siege  and 
Garrison. 


Field. 


Moun- 
tain. 


• 

£ 

T2 

u 

a 

00 

© 

06 

as 

1 

ft 

CO 

in. 

a. 
in. 

a, 

in. 

in. 

in. 

in. 

in. 

in. 

in. 

0.12 

0.12. 

0.12 

0.13 

0.13 

0.14 

0.15 

0.14 

0.10 

in. 

0.10 


9.   What  amount  of  windage  is  allowed  to 
mortars  f 


IRON. 

BRASS. 

IRON. 

Heavy. 

Light. 

Stone 
Mortar. 

Coehorn 
24-pdr. 

Eprou- 
vette. 

inches. 
0.13 

inches. 
0.13 

inches. 
0.13 

inches. 
0.12 

inches. 

inches. 
0.14 

inches. 
0.025 

90        BAND-BOOK  OF  ARTILLERY. 

Part  Till. 
GUNPOWDEB. 

1.  What  are  the  ingredients  in  gunpowder  ? 
Saltpetre,  charcoal,  and  sulphur. 

2.  What  are  the  proportions  ? 

In  the  United  States,  75  to  7G  saltpetre,  14 
to  15  charcoal,  and  10  sulphur. 

England,  75  saltpetre,    15  charcoal,    10  sulphur. 
France,      75         «  12£         "  12§      u 

Prussia,      75         "  13%         "  11£      " 

3.  What  is  the  combustible  ingredient? 
Charcoal. 

4.  What  is  the  use  of  the  saltpetre? 

It  furnishes  the  oxygen  necessary  to  sup- 
port a  rapid  combustion,  and  to  change  the 
whole  mass  into  gas. 

5.  What  is  the  use  of  sulphur  .■' 

It  adds  consistency  to  the  mixture  and 
intensity  to  the  flame,  besides  rendering  the 
powder  less  liable  to  absorb  moisture. 

6.  On  what  does  the  quality  of  gunpowder 
depend  ? 

On  the  intimate  mixture  and  proper  pro- 
portions and  purity  of  the  ingredients. 

7.  In  what  does  the  manufacture  of  gunpow- 
der consist  ? 

In  pulverizing  the  ingredients,  incorpora- 
tion, compression,  granulation,  drying,  glaz- 
ing, and  dusting. 


GUNPOWDER.  91 

8.  Explain  the  method  of  making  gunpowder 
by  the  pounding  mill. 

The  charcoal  in  small  pieces  is  first  placed 
in  the  mortars,  with  a  quantity  of  water, 
and  pounded  for  half  an  hour;  after  which, 
the  saltpetre  and  then  the  sulphur,  previous- 
ly pulverized  and  sifted,  are  put  in,  and  the 
whole  well  mixed  with  the  hand ;  it  is  then 
pounded  in  the* mortars,  and  at  the  end  of 
each  hour,  the  composition  is  passed  from 
each  mortar  into  the  next.  At  the  sixth  or 
eighth  change,  add  half  a  pint  of  water;  it 
is  then  pounded  two  hours  without  changing 
the  mortars,  in  order  that  it  may  form  into 
cake.  It  is  then  partially  dried,  and  grained 
in  a  graining  sieve,  or  passed  between  wood- 
en rollers.  The  grains  are  then  sifted  to 
separate  those  which  are  too  coarse  and  too 
fine,  and  also  to  separate  from  each  other 
the  different  kinds  of  grains  for  cannon,  mu% 
ket,  and  rifle  powder.  It  is  then  glazed  in 
large  glazing  barrels,  which  make  15  or  20 
revolutions  in  a  minute.  A  charge  of  500 
lbs.,  is  thus  treated  for  about  twenty -four 
hours.  It  is  then  dried  either  in  the  open 
air,  or  in  a  drying  house.  If  in  the  open  air, 
when  the  sun  is  too  hot,  the  powder  should 
be  covered  to  prevent  the  loss  of  sulphur. 
It  is  then  dusted,  by  being  sifted  in  fine 
sieves,  or  through  bolting  cloths. 

9.  What  other  machines  besides  the  pound- 
ing mill  are  used  in  pulverizing  and  incorpo- 
rating the  ingredients  of  gunpowder  ? 

Boiling  barrels,  and  the  cylinder  or  rolling 
mill. 


92  HAND-BOOK   OF   ARTILLERY. 

10.  What  advantage  is  gained  by  the  use  of  • 

^ROLLING    BARREL8? 

It  lessens  the  duration  and  danger  of 
pounding  in  the  mortars.  After  the  ingre- 
dients are  pulverized  and  mixed  in  the  roll- 
ing barrels,  the  mixture  is  placed  under  the 
pestles  of  the  pounding  mill,  10  per  cent,  of* 
water  is  added,  and  it  is  beaten  for  three 
hours  only. 

11.  Which  mill  is  now  generally  used? 
The   cylinder   mill,    which    performs  at 

the  same  time  the  operations  of  pulverizing, 
incorporating,  and  pressing  the  composition. 
It  consists  of  two  cylinders,  of  marble  or 
cast-iron,  weighing  about  five  tons  each, 
rolling  in  a  circular  trough  of  the  §ame 
material,  the  inner  diameter  of  which  is 
about  three  feet;  a  wooden  plough  follow 
the  cylinders,  to  bring  the  powder  toward 
the  centre  of  the  trough.  The  cylinders  re- 
volve ten  times  in  a  minute,  and  run  from 
one  to  three  hours  on  each  charge  of  50  lbs. 
of  composition. 

12.  Docs  powder  inflame  instantaneously  ? 

No ;  its  inflammation  is  gradual  and  pro- 
gressive, and  in  a  gun  the  projectile  com- 
mences to  move  before  the  whole  charge  is 
ignited. 

13.  Why  should  gunpowder  be  grained  f 

In  order  to  facilitate  the  transmission  of 
the  flame.  When  the  powder  is  very  fine, 
and  in  large  and  compact  charges,  the  flame 
cannot  penetrate  it,  and  it  burns  slowly  and 
in  successive  layers. 


GUNPOWDER.  V)6 

14.  Which  burns  quickest,  the  small  or  large 
grained  powder  ? 

Before  coming  to  the  limit  of  dust,  the 
smaller  the  grain  the  more  rapid  the  com- 
bustion, and  the  greater  the  bursting  force 
of  the  powder. 

15.  What  is  the  difference  between  the  igni- 
tion and  combustion  of  large  and  small  grained 
powder  ? 

With  the  large  grained,  the  ignition  is 
more  rapid,  but  the  combustion  slower; 
with  small  grains,  the  contrary  is  the  case. 

16.  Why  should  the  grains  be  angular  ? 
Because  they  present  a  greater  surface  to 

the  action  of  the  flame,  and  therefore  burn 
quicker. 

1 7 .  Why  sho u Id  powder  be  free  fro m  dust  f 
Because  the  dust  fills  up  the  intervals  be- 
tween the  grains,  and  forming  a  compact 
mass,  retards  combustion. 

18.  To  what  special  purpose  are  large  and 
small  grained  powders  applied  ? 

The  large  for  cannon,  and  the  small  for 
small  arms. 

19.  How  is  the  size  of  the  grain  for  each 
kind  of  powder  tested  ? 

By  means  of  sieves  or  gauges. 

20.  How  many  grains  of  powder  are  in  10 
grains  Troy  weight? 

Cannon,  150 ;  Musket,  2,000  to  2,500  j  and 
Jiifle,  12,000  to  15,000. 

21.  What  is  the  object  in  glazing  powder  ? 
Glazed  powder  does  not  absorb  moisture, 

or  break  up  in  transportation,  so  much  as 
unglazed. 


94  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

22.  What  is  the  established  mode,  of  proving 
the  strength  of  powder  in  the  U.  S.  ? 

A  sample  is  taken  from  each  barrel,  and 
the  strength  determined  b}T  the  eptfouvette 
mortar. 

23.  What  is  the  least  range  allowed  t 

The  general  mean  range  of  new  powder 
must  not  be  less  than  250  yards;  but  no 
powder  ranging  below  225  yards  is  received. 

24.  When  is  powder  in  magazines  considered 
unserviceable  f 

When  it  does  not  range  over  180  yards. 

25.  What  is  the  range  of  good  powder  ? 
Cannon    from   280  to  300  yards.      Small 

grained  from  300  to  320  yards. 

26.  What  other  means  is  there  for  determin- 
ing the  strength  of  powder  f 

The  Gun  and  Ballistic  Pendulum,  and 
Nave//  Electro-ballistic  Machine.  The 
latter  is  considered  the  best  for  determining 
the  initial  velocity. 

27.  What  is  the  hygrometric proof  of  powder? 
Samples  are  placed  in  shallow  tin  pans, 

set  in  a  tub,  the  bottom  of  which  is  covered 
with  water;  the  pans  should  be  about  an 
inch  above  the  water,  and  the  tub  covered. 
Good  powder  will  not  absorb  more  than  2£ 
per  cent,  in  24  hours. 

28.  How  can  the  relative  quickness  of  two 
lands  of  powder  be  determined  ? 

By  burning  a  train  laid  in  a  circular  or 
other  groove,  which  returns  into  itself,  made 
in  a  piece  of  hard  wood;  one-half  of  the 
groove  being  filled  with  each  kind  of  pow- 


GUNPOWDER.  95 

der,  and  fire  communicated  at  the  junction 
of  the  two  trains,  the  relative  quickness  is 
readily  deduced  from  observation  of  the 
point  at  which  the  flames  meet. 

29.  What  are  the  qualities  of  good  powder  ? 

It  should  be  perfectly  free  from  dust,  uni- 
form in  strength  and  size  of  grains,  angular 
and  irregular  in  form;  in  color,  brownish 
black,  or  slate  color ;  so  hard  as  not  to  be 
easily  crushed  by  pressure  with  the  finger; 
and  should  leave  no  beads  or  foulness  when 
flashed  in  quantities  of  10  grs.  on  a  copper 
plate. 

30.  What  is  the  expansive  velocity,  and 
pressure  of  ignited  powder  ? 

The  expansive  velocity  is  about  5,000  feet 
per  second,  and  j>ressure  about  2,000  atmos- 
pheres. 

31.  What  is  the  weight  of  a  cubic  inch  of 
powder  ? 

About  half  an  ounce;  a  cubic  foot  will 
therefore  weigh  about  54  pounds,  and  32 
cubic  inches  one  pound. 

32.  How  is  government  powder  packed? 

In  barrels  of  100  lbs.  each ;  the  barrels 
being  large  enough  to  allow  sufficient  space 
for  the  powder  to  move  when  rolled  to  pre- 
vent its  caking. 

33.  How  are  the  barrels  marked? 

On  one  head  with  the  place  and  year  of 
manufacture,  and  with  the  kind  of  grain : 
cannon,  musket,  or  rifle  ;  on  the  other  head 
with  the  year  in  which  it  was  proved  and 
the  proof-range,  leaving  room  for  subsequent 


96  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

proofs,  which  are  marked  in  the  same  man- 
ner. 

34.  When  powder  is  injured-  by  dampness, 
can  it  be  restored? 

If  the  water  absorbed  does  not  exceed  7 
per  cent.,  it  can  be  by  drying.  If  it  has  ab- 
sorbed from  7  to  12  per  cent.,  after  drying 
it  remains  porous  and  friable,  and  is  unfit  for 
transportation.  In  this  case  it  is  better  to 
work  it  over. 

35.  How  is  powder  stored  ? 

In  magazines  especially  constructed  for 
the  purpose.  The  barrels  are  generally 
placed  near  the  sides,  three  tiers  high,  or 
four  tiers  if  necessary  j  small  skids  should 
be  placed  on  the  floor  and  between  the  sev- 
eral tiers  of  barrels,  in  order  to  steady 
them,  and  chocks  should  be  placed  at  inter- 
vals on  the  lower  skid,  to  prevent  the  roll- 
ing of  the  barrels. 

36.  How  are  the  different  kinds  of  powder 
arranged  ? 

Those  barrels  of  the  same  kind,  place  and 
date  of  fabrication,  and  proof-range,  are 
piled  together. 

37.  Should  it  be  necessary  to  pile  the  barrels 
more  than  four  tiers  high,  what  is  done  ? 

The  upper  tiers  are  supported  by  a  frame 
resting  on  the  floor,  or  the  barrels  may  be 
placed  on  their  heads,  with  boards  between 
the  tiers. 

38.  What  is  necessary  for  the  preservation 
of  the  powder  ? 

The  magazine  should  be  opened  and  aired 


GUNPOWDER.  9  / 

in  clear,  dry  weather,  and  the  ventilators 
should  be  kept  free. 

39.  How  may  the  moisture  of  a  magazine  be 
absorbed  ? 

By  chloride  of  calcium  suspended  in  a  box 
under  the  arch,  and  renewed  from  time  to 
time. 

40.  When  the  magazine  is  open,  ivhat  pre- 
cautions should  be  observed? 

The  sentinel  or  guard  should  have  no  fire- 
arms, and  any  one  who  enters  it  should  take 
off  his  shoes,  or  put  socks  over  them.  No 
sword  or  cane,  or  anything  which  might  oc- 
casion sparks,  should  be  carried  in. 

41.  How  should  powaer  in  barrels  be  trans- 
ported ? 

The  barrels  should  never  be  rolled;  they 
should  be  carried  in  hand-barrows,  or  slings 
made  of  rope  or  leather.  In  wagons,  the 
barrels  should  be  packed  in  straw,  and  not 
allowed  to  rub  against  each  other,  and  the 
whole  covered  with  thick  canvas. 

42.  What  precaution  should  be  used  to  pre- 
vent powder  caking  ? 

The  barrels  should  be  taken  outside  the 
magazine  and  rolled  on  boards. 

43.  Where  should  cartridge-hags  be  filled  ? 
In  the  filling-room  of  the  laboratory,  or  a 

small    magazine,    and    not    in    the   general 
e 
9 


98  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 


Part  IX. 
PROJECTILES. 

1.  What  projectiles  are  made  use  of  in  the 
service? 

Solid  shot,  shells,  spherical-case  or  shrap- 
nel, canister,  grape,  grenades,  stones,  car- 
casses, light  and  fire-halls. 

2.  What  is  a  solid  shot  f 

A  solid  sphere  of  cast-iron,  almost  exclu- 
sive^ appropriated  to  guns.  The  gun  de- 
rives its  denomination  from  the  weight  of 
the  shot,  as  6-pdr.,  12-pdr.,  etc. 

3.  What  is  a  shell,  and  its  use  f 

A  hollow  sphere  of  cast-iron,  containing 
powder,  which  is  ignited  by  means  of  a  fuze; 
when  fired  at  troops,  it  should  be  prepared 
to  burst  over  their  heads,  or,  if  the  ground 
be  favorable,  to  ricochet  a  little  in  front  and 
plunge  into  the  column.  When  fired  at 
works  or  buildings,  it  should  explode  after 
penetration. 

4.  What  is  a  spherical-case,  and  what  ad- 
vantages does  it  possess  f 

It  is  a  shell  much  thinner  than  the  ordi- 
nary shell,  and  filled  with  leaden  bullets  and 
a  charge  of  powder  sufficient  to  burst  it, 
which  is  done  by  means  of  a  fuze,  as  with  a 
common  shell,  at  any  required  distance.     It 


PROJECTILES.  99 

is  thus  calculated  to  extend  all  the  advan- 
tages of  canister  shot  to  distances  far  beyond 
the  reach  of  that  projectile.  It  is  fired  both 
from  guns  and  howitzers. 

5.  What  are  canister  shot  ? 

Cylindrical  tin  cases  with  iron  heads,  of 
calibre  suitable  for  different  pieces  of  ord- 
nance, filled  with  cast-iron  balls,  arranged 
in  tiers,  and  packed  in  with  dry  saw-dust ; 
they  are  fired  at  ranges  not  exceeding  400 
yards,  but  their  most  destructive  effects  are 
from  100  to  200  yards. 

6.  What  are  grape  shot  ? 

A  certain  number  of  iron  balls,  usually 
nine,  put  together  by  means  of  two  cast-iron 
plates,  two  rings  and  one  pin  and  nut.  Each 
plate  has  on  the  inside  three  beds  for  the 
shot,  of  a  depth  equal  to  half  the  thickness 
of  the  plate,  and  of  the  form  of  a  spherical 
segment,  the  curvature  of  which  is  the  same 
as  that  of  the  shot.  An  iron  pin,  riveted  to 
the  bottom  iron  plate,  passes  through  the 
centre  and  also  through  the  top  plate,  where 
the  whole  is  secured  by  a  nut  and  screw. 

Note. — The  use  of  these  shot  for  field  pieces  has  been 
discontinued,  canister  answering  the  purpose  of  these  shot. 

7.  How  were  the  balls  fixed  in  the"  old  pat- 
tern f 

The}'  were  placed  in  tiers  around  an  iron 
.pin  attached  to  an  iron  tompion  at  the  bot- 
tom, and  put  into  a  canvas  bag,  and  then 
quilted  around  with  a  strong  cord. 

8.  What  is  a  grenade  ? 

A  shell  thrown  from  the  hand,  or  in  bas- 


100  Hand-book  of  artillery. 

kets  from  the  stone-mortar,  and  ignited  as 
otlier  shells  by  means  of  a  fuze. 

9.  How  many  kinds  of  grenades  are  made 
use  of? 

Hand  grenades  and  rampart  grenades.  Six- 
pbunder  spherical-case  may  be  used  for  the 
former,  and  shells  of  any  calibre  for  the  lat- 
ter. 

10.  To  what  purposes  are  grenades  applied? 
They  are  useful  in  the  defence  of  works, 

the  smaller  thrown  by  hand  into  the  head  of 
a  sap,  trenches,  covered-way,  or  upon  the 
besiegers  mounting  a  breach;  the  larger 
kinds  are  rolled  over  the  parapet  in  a 
trough. 

11.  What  is  a.  carcass,  and  its  use? 

It  is  a  spherical  shell  having  three  addi- 
tional holes  of  the  same  dimensions  as  the 
fuze  hole,  pierced  at  equal  distances  apart 
in  the  upper  hemisphere  of  the  shell,  and 
filled  with  a  composition  which  burns  with 
intense  power  from  eight  to  ten  minutes, 
and  the  flame  issuing  from  the  holes  sets  fire 
to  everything  combustible  within  its  reach; 
it  is  used  in  bombardments,  setting  fire  to 
shipping,  etc.;  and  is  projected  from  cannon 
like  a  common  shell. 

12.  What  is  a  substitute  for  a  carcass  ? 
Common   shells   loaded  in   the   following 

manner:  The  bursting  charge  is  placed  in 
the  bottom  of  the  shell  in  a  flannel  bag,  over 
winch  carcass  composition  is  driven  until 
the  shell  is  nearly  filled  ;  then  insert  four  or 
five  strands  of  quick-match,  which  must  be 
secured  by  driving  more  composition  upon 


t  PROJECTILES.  101 

it.     These  shells,  after  burning  as  a  carcass, 
explode. 

13.  What  is  a  fire-ball ,  and  its  use  ? 

It  is  a  projectile  of  an  oval  shape,  formed 
of  sacks  of  canvas  filled  with  combustible 
composition  which  emits  a  bright  flame.  Its 
use  is  to  light  up  the  enemy's  works,  and  it 
is  loaded  with  a  shell  to  prevent  it  from 
being  approached. 

14.  What  is  a  light-ball  t 

Light-balls  are  the  same  as  fire-balls,  ex- 
cept that  there  is  no  shell  in  them,  as  they 
are  used  for  lighting  up  our  own  works. 

15.  What  is  a  smoke-ball  ? 

A  hollow  paper  sphere,  similar  to  a  light 
ball,  and  filled  with  a  composition  which 
admits  a  dense,  nauseous  smoke;  it  is  em- 
ployed to  suffocate  the  enemy's  miners  when 
at  work,  or  to  conceal  one's  own  operations; 
it  burns  from  twenty-five  to  thirty  minutes. 

16.  In  field  pieces,  to  what  is  the  projectile 
attached  ? 

To  a  block  of  wood  called  a  sabot. 

17.  Are  the  projectile  and  cartridge  ever  at- 
tached to  the  same  sabot? 

Yes;  in  field  guns,  and  the  13-pdr.  field 
howitzer;  the  whole  then  constitutes  a  round 
of  fixed  ammunition. 

18.  What  is  the  arrangement  in  case  of  the 
32  and  f&A-pdr.  field  howitzers? 

The  projectile  is  separate  from  the  charge, 
and  the  cartridge  is  attached  to  a  block  of 
wood  called  the  cartridge-block,  the  object  of 
which  is  to  give  a  finish  to  the  cartridge  and 
fill  the  chamber. 


11  '■PJ*J"*pim™_ 

102  HAND-BOOK   OF   ARTILLERY.' 

19.  What  difference  is  there  in  sabots  for 
field  service? 

Sabots  for  shot  and  spherical-ease  or  guns 
have  one  groove  for  attaching  the  cartridge — 
those  for  gun  canisters  and  for  the  lSJ-pdr. 
howitzer  shells,  spherical-case  and  canisters 
have  two  grooves.  Those  for  the  32  and 
24-pdr.  howitzers  have  no  grooves,  but  are 
furnished  with  handles  made  of  cord,  pass- 
ing through  two  holes  in  the  sabot,  and  fas- 
tened by  knots  on  the  inside. 

'20.  Mow  are  projectiles  for  field  service  fas- 
tened to  the  sabot  ? 

By  straps  of  sheet  tin,  or  of  strong  canvas 
when  tin  or  sheet  iron  cannot  be  procured. 

21.  How  many  straps  are  employed,  and  how 
are  they  fastened  ? 

For  shot,  there  are  two  straps  crossing  at 
right  angles,  one  passing  through  a  slit  in 
the -middle  of  the  other.  For  shells,  there 
are  four  straps  soldered  to  a  ring  of  tin,  or 
fastened  to  it  by  cutting  four  slits  in  the 
ring,  into  which  the  upper  ends  of  the 
strap  arc  hooked,  and  turned  down  on 
the  inside  of  the  ring.  The  sabots  for  32 
and  24-pdr.  field  howitzers  having  no 
groove,  each  strap  is  fastened  by  one  nail 
on  the  side,  and  two  under  the  bottom  of 
the  sabot. 

22.  What  is  a  canister  for  field  ser- 
vice ? 

It  consists  of  a  tin  cylinder  attached  to  a 
sabot,  and  filled  with  cast-iron  shot. 

23.  How  is  it  made? 

The  cylinder  is  fastened  to  the  sabot  by 


PROJECTILES.  103 

six  or  eight  nails,  and  a  plate  of  rolled  iron 
is  placed  at  the  bottom  on  the  sabot.  It  is 
closed  with  a  sheet-iron  cover  after  being 
filled,  the  top  of  the  cylinder  being  cut  into 
strips  half  an  inch  long,  and  turned  down 
over  the  cover. 

24.  In  cdse  of  heavy  guns  are  the  shot  at- 
tached to  the  sabot? 

They  are  generally  without  a  sabot. 

25.  How  is  it  with  shells  ? 

They  are  strapped  to  sabots  made  of  thick 
plank,  with  strips  of  tin,  as  in  case  of  strap- 
ping shot  for  field  service. 

20.  Row  is  it  with  canister  for  siege  and  sea- 
coast  guns? 

They  have  no  sabot;  the  tin  is  turned 
over  the  iron  bottom. 

27.  How  is  it  with  canisters  for  the  S-inch 
siege  and  sea-coast  howitzers? 

They  are  attached  to  sabots  in  the  same 
way  as  the  field  howitzer  canisters.  The 
sabot  for  the  siege  howitzer  has  a  hemi- 
spherical bottom,  and  the  sea-coast  a  conical 
one.  to  suit  the  connecting  surface  between 
the  cylinder  of  the  bore  and  the  chamber  in 
these  pieces. 

28.  Are  sabots  used  with  grape  shot  ? 
Yes,  in  the  8-inch  sea-coast  howitzer. 
20.  What  is  its  form,  and  how  fastened?  • 
It  is  conical;  and  may  be  fastened  to  the 

lower  plate  with  screws,  or  the  pin  may  be 
made  long  enough  to  pass  through  it;  or 
else  the  sabot  may  be  inserted  into  the  piece 
separately  from  the  stand  of  grape. 


104  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

30.  What  is  the  object  of  fixing  shot  or  shells 
to  wooden  bottoms  f 

To  prevent  injury  to  brass  cannon;  and 
to  insure  the  fiize  of  a  shell  being  retained 
in  the  axis  of  the  piece. 

Sl^]V/«tt  proportion  does  the  weight  of  one 
shot  bear  to  that  of  another? 

The  proportion  is,  as  the  cubes  of  their 
diameters. 

82.  //<>//•  is  the  weight  of  a  cast-iron  shot  or 
shell  determined  ? 

Multiply  the  cube  of  the  diameter  of  the 
shot  in  inches,  or  the  difference  of  the  cubes 
of  the  exterior  and  interior  diameters  of  the 
shell  by  0.134  for  the  weight  in  pounds.  In 
case  of  lead  balls,  the  multiplier  is  0.214. 

The  cube  of  the  radius  in  inches  of  a  cast-irou  shot  will 
he  very  nearly  equal  to  its  weight  in  pounds. 

33.  How  is  the  diameter  of  a  cast-iron  shot 
of  a  given  weight  found  ? 

Divide  the  weight  in  pounds  by  0.134,  and 
extract  the  cube  root  of  the  quotient,  which 
will  be  the  diameter  in  inches. 

34.  How  is  the  quantity  of  powder  which  a 
shell  will  contain  found  ? 

Multiply  the  cube  of  the  interior  diameter 
of  the  shell  in  inches,  by  0.01744  for  the 
weight  of  powder  in  pounds. 

Note. — These  multipliers  are  found  as  follows:  Suppose 
II  to  represent  the  weight  of  a  body,  1)  its  density,  V 
its  volume,  and  g  the  weight  of  the  unit  of  mass,  then 
W=DVg.  Now,  if  a  cubic  inch  of  distilled  water  at  the 
standard  temperature  be  taken  as  the  unit  of  mass,  g  will 
be  numerically   ry^g  pounds.      Hence,   W—JDV  j^%= 

l).036201Z>  1=0.036201  D~dz  (supposing  d  to  be  the  di- 


PROJECTILES.  105 

amcter  and  the  body  to  be  spherical)=0. 036201  X  0.5236 
D(P=Q. 018955 /W3.  If  we  now  substitute  for  D  the  spe- 
cific gravity  of  cast-iron  shot  or  shells=7.000,  we  have  W 
=  7  X  0.018955cP  =  0.13-W3/  and  if  for  D  we  substitute 
the  specific  gravity  of  lead,  H7'=0.2142rf3;  and  in  case  of 
powder.  11=0.01 744r£3. 

For  diameters,  weights,  and  charges,  see  Tables,  pages 
115-118. 

35.  When  shot  are  heated  to  a  white  heat, 
what  expansion  takes  place? 


CALIBRE. 

8-in.     42 

32   1   24 

18 

12 

Expansion inches. 

| 
0.149  0.11 

0.10 

0.08 

0.06  0.04 

36.  Do  heated  shot  retain  a  permanent  en- 
largement f 

Yes;  in  case  of  the  8-in.  shot,  for  example, 
after  the  first  cooling  the  enlargement  is 
0.054  in.;  and  after  the  second,  0.09,9  in. 

37.  Are  the  igniting  powers  of  a  hot  shot  de- 
stroyed by  ricocheting  upon  the  water? 

Xo;  a  shot,  properly  heated,  will  ignite 
wood  after  having  struck  the  water  several 
times. 

38.  What  is  the  peculiarity  of  cartridges  for 
hot  shot  ? 

There  are  two  cartridge-bags,  one  being 
inserted,  choke  foremost,  in  another  of  the 
next  higher  calibre,  and  the  end  of  the  lat- 
ter folded  under. 

39.  Explain  the  process  of  loading  with  hot 
shot. 

The  piece  should  be  sponged  with  great 
care,  and  the  wTortn  frequently  passed   into 


106  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

the  bore.  As  a  precaution,  it  is  well  to 
insert  a  wet  Bponge  just  before  putting  in 
the  ball.  The  muzzle  is  sufficiently  elevated 
to  allow  the  ball  to  roll  down  the  bore;  the 
cartridge  is  inserted,  the  mouth  of  the  outer 
bag  foremost,  the  fold  down,  and  carefully 
pushed  home  without  breaking  it;  a  dry  bay 
wad  is  placed  upon  it  and  rammed  once; 
then  a  clay  or  wet  hay  wad,  and  rammed 
twice ;  and,  finally,  if  firing  at  angles  of  de- 
pression, a  wad  of  clay  a  half  calibre  in 
length,  or  a  wet  hay  wad  is  put  on  the  ball. 

40.  May  the  ball  cool  in  the  gun  loithout 
igniting  the  charge? 

Yes,  with  proper  precaution  in  loading. 
The  piece,  however,  should  be  fired  with  as 
little  delay  as  possible,  as  the  vapor  which 
arises  from  the  action  of  the  hot  ball  on  the 
water  contained  in  the  wad,  diminishes  the 
strength  of  the  powder.- 

41.  What  means  are  afforded  at  the  seaboard 
forts  for  heating  shot  ? 

Furnaces  for  this  purpose  are  erected, 
which  hold  60  or  more  shot. 

42.  What  length  of  time  is  required  to  heat 
them  to  a  red  heat  ? 

The  shot  being  placed,  and  the  furnace 
cold,  it  requires  one  hour  and  fifteen  min- 
utes; but  after  the  furnace  is  once  heated, 
a  24-pdr.  shot  is  brought  to  a  red  heat  in 
twenty-five  minutes;  the  32-pdr.  and  42-pdr. 
shot  require  a  few  minutes  longer. 

43.  Describe  grates  for  heating  shot. 

In  siege  and  other  batteries,  where  there 
are  no  furnaces,  a  grate  is  used.     It  consists 


PROJECTILES.  107 

of  four  bars  1.75  inches  square,  three  feet 
long,  placed  four  inches  apart  on  three  iron 
stands,  with  legs  one  foot  in  height.  It  is 
placed  in  an  excavation  one  foot  in  depth, 
of  the  width  of  the  grate,  perpendicular  at 
the  back  and  side,  open  in  front,  the  legs 
resting  on  bricks  or  stones  rising  about  four 
or  five  inches  from  the  bottom.  A  roof  is 
made  over  it  with  hoops  of  flat  iron,  cover- 
ed with  sods  and  eighteen  inches  of  earth, 
having  in  the  back  part  a  chimney  6  inches 
square.  The  shot  are  placed  on  the  back 
part  of  the  grate,  leaving  one-fourth  of 
the  front  part  free ;  and  under  and  on  the 
front  part  the  wood  is  put,  cut  in  pieces 
about  fourteen  inches  long  and  two  inches 
thick.  A  thick  sod  is  used  as  a  register,  to 
regulate  the  draught  of  the  chimney,  so  that 
no  flame  can  issue  from  the  front.  This 
grate,  which  will  contain  about  fifteen  24- 
pdr.  balls,  heats  them  to  a  red  heat  in  an 
hour,  and  will  supply  three  guns. 

44.  How  are  wads  for  firing  hotshot  made  f 
Of  hay;  by  twisting  from  the  hay  a  rope 
of  an  inch  or  an  inch  and  a  half  in  diame- 
ter, and  then  commencing  at  one  end,  and 
doubling  it  up  about  one  calibre  in  length, 
twisting  it  all  the  time  until  it  becomes  near- 
ly large  enough,  when  the  rope  is  wound 
around  the  wad  perpendicular  to  its  axis, 
and  fastened  with  a  hitch.  Or  the  hay  may 
be  rammed  in  a  form  of  proper  calibre,  and 
then  bound  with  spun  yarn,  and  afterward 
rammed  a  second  time. 


108  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

45.  Have  hot  shot  been  almost  entirely  super- 
seded ? 

Yes;  since  the  adoption  of  the  method  of 
throwing  large  hollow  shot  from  Ion*;-  pieces. 
These  require  but  little  preparation,  can  be 
used  at  once,  and  are  more  terrible  in  their 
effects. 

46.  What  are  ring  or  grommet  wads,  and 
their  use? 

The}'  consist  of  a  ring  of  rope  yarn,  about 
0.7  in.  thick,  with  two  pieces  of  strong  twine 
tied  across  at  right  angles  to  each  other. 
The  size  of  the  ring  is  the  full  diameter  of 
the  bore,  in  order  that  it  may  fit  tight  and 
stop  the  windage.  They  increase  the  accu- 
racy of  fire,  and  arc  to  be  preferred  when 
the  object  of  the  wad  is  to  retain  the  ball  in 
its  place,  as  in  firing  at  a  depression.  They 
stop  the  windage  best  when  placed  behind 
the  ball.  They  may  be  attached  to  the 
straps,  or  to  the  ball  by  twine,  or  may  be 
inserted  like  other  wads  after  the  ball. 

47.  How  are  junk  wads  made;  and  for 
what  are  they  used  ? 

Wad-moulds  for  each  calibre,  consisting  of 
two  cast-iron  cylinders  of  different  diame- 
ters set  in  oak,  or  of  two  strong  pieces  of 
oak,  strapped  with  iron,  and  joined  by  a 
hinge,  are  employed  in  their  manufacture. 
The  junk,  after  having  been  picked,  is  com- 
pressed by  being  beaten  in  the  smaller  mould 
with  a  maul  and  cylindrical  drift — the  latter 
nearly  of  the  size  of  the  mould — until  it  as- 
sumes the  requisite  dimensions;  it  is  then 
taken  out  by  raising  the  upper  part  of  the 


PROJECTILES.  109 

mould,  and  closely  wrapped  with  rope  yarn, 
passed  over  it  in  the  direction  of  the  axis  of 
the  cylinder,  and  fastened  by  a  few  turns 
around  the  middle  of  the  wad.  It  is  then 
placed  in  the  large  mould,  and  again  beaten 
with  the  maul  and  drift  until  its  diameter  is 
increased  to  that  of  the  mould,  when  it  is 
taken  out  and  its  diameter  verified  by  a 
wooden  gauge  corresponding  to  the  large 
shot  gauge  of  the  calibre.  These  wads  are 
used  for  proving  cannon. 

48.  Describe  thejwocess  of  loading  field  shells. 
They    are    set    up    on    their    sabots,   the 

charges  measured  out  in  the  proper  powder 
measure,  and  poured  in  through  a  copper 
funnel.  The  fuze-plugs  are  then  driven  in 
with  a  mallet,  allowing  the  tops  to  project 
about  0.1  in.,  care  being  taken  not  to  split 
them.  The  holes  in  the  plugs  are  then  care- 
fully reamed  out,  and  stopped  with  tow- 
wads,  which  are  pressed  in  firmly  with  a 
round  stick. 

49.  Describe  the  process  of  loading  spherical- 
case  shot 

The  shot  having  been  cleaned,  the  balls 
are  put  in.  A  stick  with  a  less  diameter 
than  the  fuze-hole,  and  having  a  groove  on 
each  side  of  it,  is  inserted  and  pushed  to  the 
bottom  of  the  chamber  by  working  the  balls 
aside.  The  shot  is  then  placed  in  a  sand- 
bath  or  oven,  and  brought  to  a  proper  tem- 
perature to  receive  the  sulphur,  which  in  a 
melted  state  is  poured  in  to  fill  up  the  inter- 
stices between  the  balls;  the  shot  is  allowed 
10 


110  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

to  cool,  and  the  sulphur  to  harden,  when  the 
stick  is  withdrawn,  and  the  sulphur  adher- 
ing to  the  sides  of  the  eye  and  the  surface  of 

tlit.1  shot  is  removed.  If  a  fuze-plug  and 
paper  fuze  are  to  be  used,  the  charge  is 
poured  in,  and  the  plug  inserted  exactly  as 
in  case  of  a  shell;  but,  if  the  Bormann  fuze 
is  to  be  used,  the  charge  is  inserted  and  the 
stopper  and  fuze  screwed  into  their  places, 
care  being  taken  before  placing  the  fuze  in 
position  to  puncture  the  covering  of  the 
magazine,  so  that  the  fire  can  communicate 
with  the  charge. 

Spherical-case  are  now  usually  loaded  by 
putting  in  the  bullets,  and  pouring  melted 
sulphur  in  until  the  case  is  full.  After  the 
sulphur  has  cooled,  the  space  for  the  powder 
is  bored  out  by  a  cutter,  which  removes  both 
the  sulphur  and  portions  of  the  bullets  from 
the  space.  This  is  a  quicker  method,  and 
gives  a  more  compact  projectile. 

50.  What  advantages  does  this  mode  of  load- 
ing possess  over  the  old  mode  ? 

In  the  old  mode  there  was  a  liability  to 
accidents,  and  if  the  powder  remained  in 
for  any  length  of  time  before  being  used,  it 
was  ground  up  and  became  impaired.  By 
the  new  mode  the  powder  can  be  placed  in 
the  small  chamber,  and  allowed  to  remain 
without  fear  of  damage  or  danger,  and  be 
ready  for  use  when'  required.  Being,  be- 
sides, in  a  compact  mass,  instead  of  scat- 
tered among  the  bullets,  its  power  is  much 
greater,  and  acts  more  effectively  in  throw- 
ing the  bullets  outward  from  the  centre. 


PROJECTILES.  Ill 

51.  Describe  the  process  of  filling  mortar 

SHELLS. 

Having  been  inspected  to  see  that  they 
are  clean,  dry,  and  in  good  order,  place 
them  on  a  block  made  for  the  purpose,  or 
on  rings  of  rope,  or  in  indentations  in  the 
floor  of  the  magazine,  or  on  the  ground, 
with  the  eyes  up.  The  charge  measured  out 
in  a  powder  measure  is  poured  in  through 
a  funnel,  and  any  incendiary  composition, 
such  as  pieces  of  port-fire,  rock-fire,  etc.,  is 
inserted.  In  the  meantime  the  fuze  is  cut 
to  the  proper  length  according  to  the  range, 
by  resting  it  in  a  groove  made  in  the  block, 
or  inserting  it  in  a  hole  made  in  a  block,  or 
in  a  post,  and  sawing  it  across  with  the  fuze- 
saw;  or  the  fuze  may  be  bored  through  with 
a  gimlet  perpendicularly  to  the  axis  at  the 
proper  point.  The  fuze  is  then  tried  in  the 
eye,  and  should  enter  f  of  its  length.  Jf  it 
does  not,  it  may  be  reduced  by  rasping. 
The  head  of  it  is  covered  with  tow  to  pre- 
vent the  breaking  of  the  composition,  the 
fuze-setter  placed  on*,  and  the  fuze  driven 
with  the  mallet  until  the  head  projects  not 
more  than  0.2  in.  to  0.4  in.  above  the  surface 
of  the  shell.  These  shells  are  generally 
filled  and  the  fuzes  driven  in  the  battery 
magazines,  as  they  are  required. 

52.  How  are  shells  for  columbiads  and 
heavy  guns  loaded  ? 

In  the  same  way  as  mortar  shells;  but  as 
paper  fuzes,  inserted  in  wooden  or  'bronze 
fuze-plugs,  are  used  instead  of  wooden  fuzes, 
the  plug  only  is  driven  into  its  place,  and 


112  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

stopped  with  tow  after  the  bursting  charge 
has  been  poured  through  it  into  the  shell. 

53.  How  are  condemned  shot  and  shell 
marked? 

With  an  X,  made  with  the  cold  chisel. 

o4.   How  should  halls  be  preserved  ? 

They  should  be  carefully  lacquered  as 
soon  as  possible  after  they  are  received. 
When  it  becomes  necessary  to  renew  the 
lacquer,  the  old  lacquer  should  be  removed 
by  rolling  or  scraping  the  balls,  which 
should  never  be  heated  for  that  purpose. 

55.  How  should  grape  and  canister  shot  be 
preserved  ? 

They  should  be  oiled  or  lacquered,  put  in 
piles  or  in  strong  boxes,  on  the  ground  floor 
or  in  dry  cellars;  each  parcel  marked  with 
its  kind,  calibre  and  number. 

56.  How  are  balls  piled  ? 

Balls  are  piled  according  to  kind  and 
calibre,  under  cover  if  practicable,  in  a 
place  where  there  is  a  free  circulation  of 
air,  to  facilitate  which  the  piles  should  be 
made  narrow,  if  the  locality  permits ;  the 
width  of  the  bottom  tier  may  be  from  12  to 
14  balls  according  to  calibre. 

Prepare  the  ground  for  the  base  of  the 
pile  by  raising  it  above  the  surrounding 
ground  so  as  to  throw  off  the  water;  level 
it,  ram  it  well,  and  cover  it  with  a  layer 
of  screened  sand.  Make  the  bottom  of  the 
pile  with  a  tier  of  unserviceable  balls  buried 
about  two-thirds  of  their  diameter  in  the 
sand;  this  base  may  be  made  permanent: 
clean  the  base  well  and  form  the  pile,  put- 


PROJECTILES.  113 

ing  the  fuze-holes  of  shells  downward  in  the 
intervals,  and  not  resting  on  the  shells  below. 
Each  pile  is  marked  with  the  number  of 
serviceable  balls  it  contains.  The  base  may 
be  made  of  bricks,  concrete,  stone,  wood,  or 
with  borders  and  braces  of  iron. 

57.  How  should  fixed  ammunition  for  can- 
non be  stored  ? 

Either  in  boxes  or  placed  in  piles,  formed 
of  two  parallel  rows  of  cartridges,  with  the 
sabots  together;  in  4  tiers  for  12-pdr.  and 
5  for  6-pdr. ;  chock  the  lower  tier  with 
strips  of  wood  fastened  with  small  nails; 
put  a  layer  of  tow  2  in.  thick  between  the 
shot;  let  the  piles  rest  on  planks,  if  there  is 
no  floor,  and  cover  them  with  tarpaulins; 
have  the  place  swept,  and  the  cartridge-bags 
brushed  otf.  Leave  a  passage  of  18  in.  be- 
tween the  double  rows,  and  keep  them  2  feet 
from  the  walls.  Fixed  ammunition  should 
not  be  put  into  powder-magazines,  if  it  can 
be  avoided ;  it  should  be  kept  in  a  dry  place 
above  the  ground  floor  if  practicable ;  the 
store-rooms  should  be  always  aired  in  fine 
weather,  the  piles  should  be  taken  down. 
and  made  up  again  every  six  months  at 
most,  the  bags  examined  and  repaired,  and 
the  damaged  cartridges  broken  up.  A  ticket 
on  each  pile  should  show  the  number  and 
kind  of  cartridges,  the  additions  to  the  pile, 
and  the  issues. 

58.  Mow  should  canisters  be  piled? 

Like  fixed  ammunition,  in  4  tiers  for  34's 
and  18's;  and  5  for  13's  and  6's.     Empty 


114  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

canisters  in  10  or  12  tiers;  the  bottoms  and 
covers  separately. 

59     HOW  Should  CARTRIDGE-BAGS    FILLED  be 

piled  ? 

Like  fixed  ammunition,  or  packed  in  boxes 
or  barrels. 

60.  How  should  loaded  shells  be  piled? 
On  the  ground  floor  of  a  secure  building 

on  planks,  if  the  floor  is  not  boarded  j  in  6 
tiers  at  most :  the  fuzes  of  the  lower  tier  in 
the  vacant  spaces  between  the  shells;  those 
of  the  other  tiers  turn  downward,  like  the 
fuze-holes  of  empty  shells ;  the  piles  should 
be  covered  with  a  tarpaulin.  Loaded  shells 
should  never  be  put  into  magazines,  except 
from  absolute  necessity. 

61.  How  should  fire-balls  be  preserved  ? 
In  a  cool  place,  separated  from  each  other 

by  shavings  or  straw,  if  they  are  piled  up. 

62.  How  is  the  number  of  shots  or  shells  in  a 
pile  computed,  of  whatever  form  thepile  maybe? 

By  multiplying  the  sum  of  the  three  par- 
allel edges,  by  one-third  of  the  number  of 
balls  in  a  triangular  face. 

63.  What  is  meant  by  the  three  parallel 
edges  of  the  pile  ? 

Of  the  rectangular  or  long  pile,  they  con- 
sist of  the  two  largest  bottom  rows  and  top 
row;  of  the  square  pile,  of  two  bottom 
rows  and  top  shot  j  and  of  the  triangular 
pile,  of  one  bottom  row,  the  shot  at  the  op- 
posite angle,  and  that  at  the  top. 

64.  How  is  the  number  of  shot  in  a  triangu- 
lar face  computed  ? 

Multiply  the  number  in  the  bottom  row, 


PROJECTILES. 


115 


plus  one,  by  half  the  number  in  the  bottom 
row,  for  the  number  required. 

65.  Sow  is  the  shot  contained  in  the  top  row 
of  a  rectangular  pile  calculated? 

One  added  to  the  difference  between  the 
lone:  and  short  bottom  rows  will  be  the 
number  required. 

66.  Sow  is  the  shot  in  an  incomplete  pile 
calculated  ? 

By  first  computing  the  number  in  the  pile 
considered  as  complete,  then  the  number  of 
what  the  upper  part  ought  to  consist;  and 
the  difference  of  these  piles  will  be  the  num- 
ber contained  in  the  frustum  or  incomplete 
portion. 

Diameters  of  Shot,  Shells  and  Spherical-case. 


13-in. 

10-in. 

8-in. 

42 

32 

24 

18 

12 

6 

in. 

12.87 

in. 
9.87 

in. 

7. 88 

in. 

6.84 

in. 
6.25 

in. 
5.68 

in. 
5.17 

in. 

4.52 

in. 
3.58 

Weights  of  Shot,  Shells  and.  Spherical-case. 


Mortars. 

Gnns  and  Howitzers. 

E  _    C  • - 

=  p  I 

C        W 

■z 

a 

c 

e 

= 

42 

32       24 

18 

12 

6 

A 

o 

GO 

•"< 

i-1 

1-1 

U.S. 

j 

lbs.     lbs. 

lbs. 

lbs. 

lbs 

llw. 

lbs. 

lbs. 

lbs. 

lbs. 

Shot 

128 

65 

42.7 

32.6   24.4 

18.5 

12.3 

6.1 

Shells 

101 

50.5 

197 

87.5 

44.5 

31 

22.5   17 

13.4 

8.4 

Sph. case 

30 

20.3 

16    1 11.86 

8.7 

6.1 

3.06 

The  8-inch  Mortar  Shell  is  used   for  the 


Siege  Howitzer. 


mmm 

116 


Weight  of  Canister  Shot. 


42 

82 

u 

~  -  — 

_  -  m 
-i  -  - 

OS 

18 

=  ±  ■- 

T  w  '5 

—  -  ~ 

-  ^ 

6 

12-pdr.  Howitzer. 

Field. 

Mountain. 

lbs. 
1.5 

lbs. 

1.14 

n.s. 

0.86 

lbs. 
0  64 

lbs. 
0.43 

lbs. 
0.32 

lbs. 
0.16 

lbs. 
0.21 

Musket  ball. 

Weights  of  Finished  Canisters  and  number  of  Shot. 


Guns. 

S-in.  Howitzer. 

42 

32 

24 

18 

12 

a- 
Siege. 

Sea- 
Coast. 

lbs. 

lbs. 

lbs. 

lbs. 

lbs. 

lbs. 

lbs. 

Weights 

No.  of  Shot 

48 

27 

37 
27 

29 
27 

23 

27 

15 

27 

53.5 
48 

54.5 
48 

Weight  of  Grape  Shot  and  Grape  Shot  Stands. 


. 

S-in. 

42 

32 

24 

18 

12 

lbs. 

lbs. 

lbs. 

lbs. 

lbs. 

lbs. 

Grape  Shol 
Stands 

6.1 

7-:.:, 

4.2 
61.2 

3.15 
39.7 

2.4 
30.6 

1.8 

22.1 

1.14 
14.8 

PROJECTILES. 


11' 


Weights  of  Fixed  Ammunition. 


Block 


and 


Shot,  strapped 

Shell, strapped  and  charged 
Spherical-case,       strapped 

charged 

Canister,  with  Sabot 

f Shot 

ftound  of    I  Shell,  -with    small 
Ammunition  -\      charge 

complete.     I  Spherical-case 

Canister 


For  Guns.        For  Howitzers. 


12 


24  12 


Cartridge,  includ-*|    }         c] 
LIB  .Cartridge-  V  Hmall      ub 


lbs. 

lbs. 

lbs. 

lbs. 

2.56 
2.06 

1.30 
1.05 

&8S 
3.10 

2.70 
2.34 

12.75 

6.28 

24.60 

18.80 

11.43 
14.80 

15.40 

5.75 
7.32 
7.60 

SI  .00 
28.50 

23.00 
21.25 

13.50 
16.91 

6.82 
8.40 

27.70 
34.10 

31.60 

21.15 
25.34 

lbs. 


1.05 


9.35 


11.30 
10.80 


10.50 
12.50 
11.85 


Charges  for  Mortar  Shells. 


J3  in. 


10-in.     8-in. 


Coe- 
liorn. 


{of  the  shell  filled  with  powder 
to  burst  the  shell 
to  blow  out  the  fuze 

_    ,.  .      C  Cannon  powder 

Ordinary  service  J  InCend>arv-matehor 
cna,Se (     other  composition 


lbs.oz. 

lbs.oz. 

lbs.oz. 

11  0 

6  0 
0  6 

7  0 

5    0 

2  0 
0    5 

3  0 

2     9 
1     0 

0  4 

1  12 

0  8 

0     6 

0    6 

lbs.oz. 

1  0 
0  8 
0    2 


118 


HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 


Charges  for  Field  Shells. 


r  to  fill  the  Bhell 

n  „. ,      I  to  burst      do    

1     to  blow  out  the  fuze- 


required 


plug. 


1    5 
0  11 


0     2 


lbs.oz. 

1    0 
0    8 

0     2 


lbs. i'/ 

0    8 
0     5 


0     1 


Remarks. 


Rifle  or  mus- 
ket powder 
is  used  in 
1>  reference 


for  service  charge |  1    0  |  0  12  |  0    7  |  to  cannon. 


Charges  for  Spherical-case  Shot. 


Charge. 


8-in. 


42 


32 


•24 


No.  of  musket  halls 
Bursting    charge    of 

powder oz 

Weight  of  shot  load 


4SG 

306 

225 

175 

120 

15 

9 

8 

6 

5 

59.5 

39. 

30.13 

22.75 

16.3 

36 
L6  :  2J 

11.    |  5.5 


Charges  for  Shells  for  Columbians  and  Heavy  Guns. 


Charge 

of  Powder. 


Columbiads. 


For  Guns. 


10- 


12 


lbs.oz. 

To  fill  the  shell...  3    4 

To  hurst  1  lie  shell  |  1     6 

To  blow  out  the] 

fuze-plntr I  0  10 

For  ordinary  ser- 
vice   ...i  3    0 


lhs.oz. 

1  12 
1     0 

0  8 

1  8 


1    8 
0  12 


0  6 

1  4 


lbs.oz. 

lbs.oz. 

lhs.oz. 

1     5 
0  11 

1     0 
0    8 

0  11 
0    7 

0    2 

0    2]/2 

o  m 

1     0 

0  12 

0  10 

0  8 

0  5 

0  1 

0  7 


LABORATORY    STORES.  119 

Part  X. 
LABOEATOEY  STOEES. 

1.  What  is  a  fuze? 

•  The  contrivance  for  communicating  fire 
to  the  charge  in  a  shell  at  any  point  of  its 
flight.  It  consists  of  some  highly  inflam- 
mable composition  inclosed  in  a  wood,  paper, 
or  metal  case. 

2.  What  fuzes  are  used  in  the  U.  S.  service? 
Wooden,   paper,    the   Bormann,    and   the 

United  States  sea-coast  fuzes. 

3    Describe  the  wooden  fuze. 

It  consists  of  a  conical  plug  of  wood,  of 
the  proper  size  for  the  fuze-hole  of  the  shell 
with  which  it  is  to  be  fired.  The  axis  of 
this  plug  is  bored  out  cylindrieally,  from  the 
large  down  to  within  a  short  distance  of  the 
small  end,  which  is  left  solid.  At  the  large 
end  a  cup  is  hollowed  out,  and  the  outside 
of  the  plug  is  divided  into  inches  and  parts, 
generally  tenths,  commencing  at  the  bottom 
of  the  cup.  The  cylindrical  space  is  filled 
with  composition,  pounded  hard,  and  as  reg- 
ularly as  possible,  and  the  cup  filled  with 
mealed  powder  moistened  with  whiskey  or 
alcohol.  The  rate  of  burning  is  determined 
by  experiment,  and  marked  on  a  Avaterproof 
cap,  which  is  tied  over  the  cup.     Knowing 


120 


HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY 


the  time  any  shell  is  to  occupy  in  its  flight, 

the  fuze  is  cut  off  with  a  saw  at  the  proper 
division,  and  firmly  set  in  the  fuze-hole  with 
a  faze-sel  and  mallet.  Say  the  fuze  hums 
W  to  the  inch.     If  a  shell  be  10"  in  reaching 

the  mark,  two  inches  of  fuze  will  burst  it  as 
it  strikes.  If  it  takes  8"  to  reach  the  mark-. 
ly6.  in.  should  be  cut  off,  etc. 

4.  What  is  the  disadvantage  of  this  fuze? 
Its  irregularity,  it  being  very  difficult  to 

pound  the  composition  so  that  equal  lengths 
will  burn  in  equal  times.  The  shell  may 
cither  burst  too  soon,  and  a  greater  part  of 
its  effect  be  lost;  or  it  may  burst  after  bury- 
ing itself  in  the  ground ;  or  it  may  burst 
after  passing  the  proper  point.  This  irregu- 
larity of  burning  is  common  to  all1  fuzes 
where  the  composition  is  driven  in  succes- 
sive layers  in  a  column  which  burns  in  the 
same  direction. 

5.  With  what  shells  is  this  fuze  used  f 
With  Mortar  shells. 

6.  What   is   the    composition   for    Mortar 
fuzes  ? 


No. 

Nitre. 

Sulphur 

Mealed 
Powder. 

Time  of 
burning  1  in. 

Remarks. 

1 
2 
3 

2 

2 

1 

1 

3 

3.8  sec. 
5.      "  ' 
2.2    " 

For  Siege  Mortars. 
Fur  Sea-Coast    *• 
For  8-in.  Howitzers. 

7.  Are  these  fuzes  always  cut  before  being 
inserted  in  the  shell  ? 

Generally  they  are;   but  they  are  some- 


LABORATORY    STORES.  121 

times  bored  through  at  the  proper  positions 
instead  of  being  sawed. 

8.  Are  they  ever  cut  obliquely  ? 

Yes,  when  the  fuze  is  so  long  as  to  render 
it  likely  that  it  will  reach  the  bottom  of  the 
shell ;  for  by  cutting  it  perpendicular  to  the 
axis,  the  whole  base  of- the  wood  might  be 
driven  in  contact  with  the  bottom  of  the 
shell,  and  pr-event  the  lighted  composition 
from  setting  fire  to  the  bursting  charge. 

0.  Describe  the  paper  fuze. 

It  consists  of  a  conical  paper  case,  contain- 
ing the  composition,  whose  rate  of  burning  is 
shown  by  the  color  of  the  case,  as  follows: 

Black burns 2"  to  the  inch. 

Red «    3"         "• 

Green "     4"  " 

Yellow "     5"         " 

Each  faze  is  made  two  inches  long,  and 
the  yellow  consequently  burns  10".  For  any 
shorter  time,  the  fuze  is  cut  with  a  sharp 
knife.  With  this  fuze  is  used  a  fuze-plug 
having  a  conical  opening,  which  is  reamed 
out  to  fit  the  paper  case  when  the  shell  is 
loaded,  and  the  fuze  is  then  pressed  in  with 
the  thumb. 

10.  What  is  the  great  advantage  of  this 
fuze  ? 

Its  simplicity,  and  the  little  trouble  re- 
quired to  place  it  in  the  shell,  rendering 
unnecessary  the  numerous  and  complicated 
instruments  such  as  saws,  fuze-setter,  and 
extractor,  files,  etc.,  which  were  formerly 
used  in  field  artillery. 
11 


122 


HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 


11.    What  is  the  composition  of  paper  fuzes 
for  field  service  f 


.Mealed 
Powder. 

Sulphur. 

Black 

Red 

| 
1                             0 
8                             3 
8                             3.5 

fellow 

Note; — Tn  case  of  heavy  guns,  columbiads  and  howit- 
zers, nitre  is  added,  and  the  fuzes  burn  bngei*. 

1 2.  Describe  the  Belgian  or  Bormann  fuze. 
The  fuze  case  is  made  of  metal  (a  compo- 
sition of  lead  and 
tin),  and  consists, 
Figure  2,  first,  of 
a  short  cylinder, 
having  at  one 
end  a  horse-shoe 
[shaped  indenta- 
tion; one  end  only 
of  which  commu- 
nicates with  the 
magazine  of  the 
fuze  placed  in  the 
Tig.  2.  centre. 

This  horse-shoe  indentation  extends  nearly 
to  the  other  end  of  the  cylinder,  a  thin  layer 
of  the  metal  only  intervening.  This  is  gra- 
duated on  the  outside  into  equal  parts  re- 
presenting seconds  and  quarter  seconds  (see 
Fig.  4).  In  the  bottom  of  this  channel  a 
smooth  layer  of  the  composition  is  placed, 


LABORATORY    STORES. 


123 


with  a  piece  of  wick  or  yarn  underneath  it. 
On  this  is  placed  a  piece  of  metal,  the  cross 


^OPVIE^ 


SECTION 


Fiff.  3. 


section  of  which  is 
wedge  shaped  (see  Fig. 
•J;  and  this,  by  ma- 
chinery, is  pressed 
down  upon  the  com- 
position, sealing  it 
hermetically  The  cy- 
lindrical opening,  re- 
presented at  a,  Fig.  2, 
is  filled  with  fine  pow- 
der and  covered  with 
a  sheet  of  tin,  which 
is  soldered,  closing  the 
magazine  from  the  ex- 
ternal air. 


Before  using  the 
fuze,  several  holes 
are  pun  died  thro' 
this  sheet  of  tin, 
to  allow  the  flame 
to  enter  the  shell. 
On  the  side  of  the 
fuze  the  thread  of 
a  screw  is  cut, 
which  fits  into  one 
cut  on  the  inside 
of  the  fuze-hole, 
and    the    fuze     is  Fig.  4. 

screwed  into  the  shell  with  a  wrench. 

The  thin  layer  of  metal  over  the  composi- 
tion is  cut  through  with  a  gouge  or  chisel, 
or  even  a  penknife,  at  the  interval  marked 


124 


HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 


with  the  number  of  seconds  which  we  wish 

the  faze  to  hum.     To  prevent  the  metal  of 

this  fuze,  which  is  soft,  from 

being  driven  into  the  shell 

l>v    the   explosive   force    of, 

the  charge,  a  circular  piecej 

of  iron,  with  :i  hole  through 

atre,  and  the  thread  of 
a  screw  on  the  outside,  Fig. 
."),  is  screwed  into  the  fuze- 
hole  before    the   fuze  is  in-  Fig.  5. 
serted. 

13.  To  what  kind  of  artillery  has  this  fuze 
been  confined  ? 

Principally  to  light  artillery,  in  firing 
shells  and  particularly  spherical-lease,  where 
regularity  and  certainty  are  essential  requi- 
sites. • 

14.  Mention  one  important  advantage  of  this 
fuze. 

The  shells  can  be  loaded,  all  ready  for  use, 
and  remain  so  any  length  of  time,  perfectly 
safe  from  explosion,  as  the  fuze  can  be 
screwed  into  its  place,  and  the  composition 
never  exposed  to  external  fire  until  the 
metal  is  cut  through. 

15.  What  is  the  only  operation  under  fire 
required? 

To  gouge  through  the  metal  at  the  proper 
point,  with  any  kind  of  chisel,  knife,  or 
other  instrument. 

10.  Describe  the  United  States  sea-coast 

FUZE. 

The  paper  case  fits  in  a  fuze-plug  of  bronze 


LABORATORY    STORES.  125 

instead  of  wood.  It  fits  the  eye  of  the  shell 
in  the  same  way  as  the  wooden  plug,  and  is 
retained  by  the  force  of  friction.  A  safety 
cap  and  primer  combined  have  been  adopted 
to  prevent  ricochets,  especially  over  the 
water,  from  extinguishing  the  fuze.  A  re- 
cess in  the  top  filled  with  priming  composi- 
tion, is  covered,  until  the  fuze  is  required  for 
use,  with  a  disk  of  lead  fitting  accurately 
the  opening.  The  fire  is  conveyed  to  the 
fuze  composition  through  a  crooked  passage 
which  is  filled  with  priming,  and  prevents 
water  from  entering  in  sufficient  quantity  to 
extinguish  the  fuze. 

For  security,  a  small  leaden  plug  is  placed 
in  the  inner  end  of  the  fuze-plug,  where  it 
remains  until  it  is  driven  out  by  the  shock 
of  the  explosion. 

When  the  shell  is  placed  in  the  piece, 
nothing  more  is  necessary  than  to  remove 
the  leaden  disk  which  covers  the  recess  in 
the  top. 

17.  When  are  paper  fuzes  for  field  shells  and 
spherical-case  inserted,  ? 

At  the  moment  of  loading  the  gun,  and 
into  wooden  fuze-plugs  previously  driven 
into  the  shell. 

IS.    What  is  a.  port-fire  ? 

It  consists  of  a  small  paper  case,  filled 
with  a  highly  inflammable  but  slow-burning 
composition,  the  flame  of  which  is  very  in- 
tense and  penetrating,  and  cannot  be  extin- 
guished by  water. 

19.   What  is  it  used  for? 


126  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

Principally  as  an  incendiary   material  in 

loading  .shells,  and  for  communicating   fire 
to  the  priming  of  guns  when  proving  them. 

20.  Wh  at  does  port-fire  composition  consist  of? 
Of*  nitre,  sulphur,  and  mealed  po\vder.  in 

different   proportions.      One   kind    is    com- 
pesed  of 

Nitre, 65    parts. 

Sulphur,       ....         22.5  « 
Mealed  powder       .         .         .     12.5  '; 

A  port-fire  ease,  eighteen  inches  in  length, 
filled  with  this  composition,  burns  ten  min- 
utes. 

21.  What  are  priming-tubes,  and  their  use? 
Small  pipes  having  a  cup  at  one  end,  and 

filled  with  a  composition  for  firing  cannon. 

22.  What  tube  is  in  general  use  in  our  ser- 
vice ? 

The  friction  primer. 

23.  Describe  it. 

It  consists  of  a  short  tube  of  metal  insert- 
ed into  a  hole  near  the  top  of  a.  longer  tube, 
and  soldered  in  that  position.  The  short 
tube  is  lined  with  a  composition  made  by 
mixing  together  two  parts  of  chlorate  of 
potassa  and  one  of  sulphuret  of  antimony, 
moistened  with  gum  water.  A  serrated 
wire  passes  through  the  short  tube  and  a 
hole  opposite  to  it  in  the  side  of  the  long 
one,  the  open  end  of  the  short  tube  being 
compressed  with  nippers,  and  the  wire  at 
the  end  of  the  serrated  part  doubled  under 
to  prevent   any  displacement.      The   other 


LABORATORY    STORES.  127 

end  of  the  wire  is  doubled  and  twisted  by 
machinery.  The  long  tube  is  filled  with 
musket  powder,  its  upper  end  being  covered 
with  shellac  varnish  blackened  with  lamp- 
black, and  its  lower  closed  with  shoemakers' 
wax  and  dipped  into  varnish. 

24.  Mention  one  great  advantage  of  the  fric- 
tion-tube ? 

It  gives  an  enemy  at  night  no  clue  to  the 
position  of  your  piece,  as  does  the  lighted 
port-fire  or  slow-match. 

25.  What  is  slow-match  ? 

A  slow-burning  match  prepared  from 
hemp  or  flax  slightly  twisted,  soaked  in  a 
strong  lye,  or  in  water  holding  in  solution 
sugar  of  lead.  Cotton  rope,  well  twisted, 
forms  a  good  match  without  any  prepara- 
tion. 

26.  How  Jong  does  slow-match  prepared  from 
hemp  or  flax  burn  ? 

Four  to  live  inches  to  the  hour. 

27.  What  is  the  use  of  slow-match? 

It  is  used  principally  for  the  purpose  of 
retaining  fire  in  the  shape  of  a  hard-pointed 
coal,  to  be  used  in  firing  cannon,  fireworks, 
etc.  It  was  formerly  used  in  field  batteries 
for  lighting  the  port-fires  with  which  the 
pieces  were  discharged;  but  both  are  now 
entirely  superseded  by  the  friction-tube. 

28.  What  is  quick-match? 

It  is  a  match  made  of  threads  of  cotton, 
or  cotton  wick,  steeped  in  gummed  brandy 
or  whiskey,  then  soaked  in  a  paste  ofVinealed 
powder  and  gummed  spirits,  and  afterward 
strewed  over  with  mealed  powder. 


128  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

29.  Wow  long  doe*  it  burn? 

One  yard  burns  in  the  open  air  thirteen 
seconds. 

30.  What  is  the  use  of  qu  ick-match  ? 

To  fire  stone  and  heavy  mortars,  and  some- 
times in  proving  pieces.  It  is  extensively 
used  in  primirig  all  kinds  of  fireworks,  such 
as  fire  and  light  balls,  carcasses,  rockets, 
priming-tubes,  etc.,  and  in  convoying  fire 
wry  rapidly  from  one  portion  of  a  piece  of 
firework  to  another. 

31.  When  used  f»r  discharging  cannon,  how 
is  the  quick-match  set  fire  to  f 

By  a  slow-match,  port-fire,  or  any  other 
convenient  material. 

32.  When  used  to  prime  carcasses,  etc.,  how 
is  it  set  on  fire  f 

By  the  flame  from  the  piece. 

33.  What  is  Valenciennes  composition  ? 

A  compound  of  50  parts  of  nitre,  28  of 
sulphur,  18  of  antimony,  and  6  of  rosin. 

34.  What  is  its  use  $ 

As  an  incendiary  composition,  in  charging 
shells  for  the  purpose  of  increasing  their  de- 
structive property,  by  setting  fire  to  build- 
ings, shipping,  etc. 


PLATFORMS.  129 


Part  XI. 

PLATFORMS. 

1.  What  is  a  PLATFORM? 

A  strong  flooring  upon  which  a  piece  of 
ordnance,  mounted  on  its  carriage,  is  ma- 
noeuvred when  in  battery. 

2.  What  is  the  object  of  a  platform  ? 

To  facilitate  the  service  of  heavy  guns  and 
mortars,  and  to  insure  accuracy  of  tire. 

3.  Mention  the  kinds  ttf  platforms  in  general 
use  in  the  service? 

Fixed  platforms  for  casemate  and  barbette 
batteries  in  fortifications,  which  are  con- 
structed with  the  works;  the  siege  platform 
for  guns  and  howitzers  and  the  siege  plat- 
form for  mortars,  the  rail  platform  and  the 
ricochet  platform. 

4.  What  properties  should  wooden  platforms 
? 

Strength  and  portability. 

5.  Are  the  pieces  composing  siege  platforms 
of  the  same  or  different  dimensions  ? 

All  of  the  same  dimensions,  viz :  9  feet 
long,  5  inches  wide,  and  3£  inches  thick; 
except  the  sleepers,  which  in  the  mortar 
platform  are  one  foot  less  in  length. 

6.  What  is  the  weight  of  each  piece  ? 
About  fifty  pounds. 


130  HAND-BOOK    OF    AttTILLERY. 

7.  What  is  the  number  of  pieces  in  the  siege 
platform  for  guns  and  howitzers  ? 

Forty-nine  .in  all  —  one  being  used  as  a 
hurter  on  the  front  part  of  the  platform,  to 
prevent  the  carriage  from  running  too  far 
forward;  and  twelve  for  sleepers. 

8.  Describe  the  method  of  laying  a  platform 
for  a  siege  gun  ot  hoioitzer? 

First  establish  the  centre  line  of  the  em- 
brasure, and  stretch  a  cord  on  this  line  from 
the  middle  of  the  embrasure  to  the  rear. 
This  is  the  directrix  of  the  platform* 

Lay  the  two  outside  sleepers  parallel  to 
this  directrix,  their  outside  edges  being  fifty- 
four  inches  distant  from  it.  The  four  other 
sleepers  are  laid  parallel  to  these,  the  edge 
of  each  fifteen  and  a  half  inches  from  the 
edge  of  the  next.  The  upper  surface  of  the 
front  ends  of  these  sleepers  to  be  fifty  inehes 
on  a  vertical  line  below -the  sole  of  the  em- 
brasure. 

They  are  laid  with  an  elevation  to  the 
rear,  of  one  and  a  half  inches  to  the  yard,  or 
four  and  a  half  inches  in  their  whole  length. 
This  elevation  may  be  determined  by  plac- 
ing a  block  four  and  a  half  inehes  high  on 
the  front  end  of  the  sleeper,  and  laying  a 
straight-edge  with  a  gunner's  lever  on  it 
from  this  block  to  the  rear  end,  then  so  ar- 
range the  earth  as  to  bring  the  level  true  in 
this  position.  The  next  set  of  sleepers  arc- 
laid  against  and  inside  of  the  first,  overlap- 
ping them  three  feet,  having  the  rear  ends 
inclined  outward,  so  that  the  outer  edges  of 


PLATFORMS.  131 

the  exterior  ones  shall  be  each  fifty-four 
inches  from  the  directrix,  and  the  spaces  be- 
tween the  edges  of  the  others  the  same  as  in 
the  first  set,  viz:  fifteen  and  a  half  inches 
from  the  edge  of  one  to  the  edge  of  the  next, 
all  having  the  elevation  to  the  rear  of  one 
and  a  half  inches  to  the  yard,  and  perfectly 
level  across.  The  earth  is  then  rammed 
firmly  around  these  sleepers,  and  made  even 
with  their  upper  surface.  The  first  deck- 
plank,  with  a  hole  through  each  end  for  the 
eye-bolts,  is  laid  in  place  perpendicular  to 
the  directrix,  its  holes  corresponding  with 
those  in  the  sleepers.  The  hurter  is  placed 
on  it,  and  the  bolts  driven  through  the  cor- 
responding holes  in  these  pieces.  The  hur- 
ter should  be  so  placed  as  to  prevent  the 
wheels  from  striking  against  the  epaulment 
when  the  piece  is  in  battery.  If  the  interior 
slope  has  a  base  of  two-sevenths  of  its  height, 
the  inner  edge  of  the  hurter  should  be  two 
and  a  half  inches  from  the  foot  of  the  slope. 
The  other  planks  are  then  laid,  each  one 
forced  against  the  preceding,  the  last  plank 
having  holes  for  the  rear  eye-bolts.  By 
drawing  out  or  driving  in  the  outside  sleep- 
ers, the  holes  through  their  rear  ends  are 
made  to  correspond  with  those  in  the  last 
deck-plank,  and  the  bolts  are  put  in. 

Drive  stakes  in  the  rear  of  each  sleeper, 
leaving  their  tops  level  with  the  upper  sur- 
face of  the  platform.  Eaise,  ram  and  level 
the  earth  in  rear  of  the  platform,  so  as  to 
have  a  plain,  hard  surface  to  support  the 


132  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

trail  when  the  recoil  is  great.  The  earth  at 
the  sides  should  be  raised  nearly  as  high  as 
the  platform,  and  well  rammed,  giving  it  a 
slight  inclination  outward  to  allow  the  water 
to  run  off. 

!>.  What  are  the  dimensions  of  this  platform? 

Fifteen  feet  by  nine  feet. 

10.  Why  is  the  elevation  to  the  rear  given  to 
this  platform? 

To  diminish  the  recoil  and  to  permit  the 
water  to  run  off. 

11.  Describe  the  platform  for  a  inortar. 
The  mortar  platform  is  composed  of  only 

half  the  number  of  sleepers  and  deck-planks 
required  for  the  gun  or  howitzer  platform. 
It  is  laid  level,  and  the  front  and  rear  deck- 
planks  are  connected  by  eye-bolts  to  every 
sleeper.  Its  depth  is  one  half  that  of  the 
previous  platform. 

12.  Describe  the  method  of  laying  the  rail 
platform. 

The  rail  platform  for  siege  mortars  con- 
sists of  three  sleepers  and  two  rails  for  the 
cheeks  of  the  mortar-bed  to  slide  on,  instead 
of  the  deck-plank,  and  is  very  strong,  and 
easily  constructed  and  laid. 

The  pieces  being  notched  to  fit,  are  driven 
together  at  the  battery,  the  distance  between 
the  centre  lines  of  the  rails  being  equal  to 
that  between  the  centre  lines  of  the  cheeks. 
The  earth  is  excavated  eight  and  a  half 
inches,  the  depth  of  the  sleepers,  and  the 
bottom  made  perfectly  level.  The  directrix 
being  exactly  marked  by  stakes,  the  plat- 


PLATFORMS.  133 

form  is  placed  in  position,  its  centre  line 
coinciding  with  a  cord  stretched  between 
the  stakes  marking  the  line  of  fire.  The 
earth  is  filled  in  ay  high  as  the  upper  surface 
of  the  sleepers,  and  firmly  rammed;  and 
stakes  are  driven  in  the  rear  angles  formed 
by  the  sleepers  and  rails,  and  one  at  the  rear 
end  of  each  rail. 

13.  Mention  the  parts  of  the  ricochet  plat- 
form. 

1  hurter.  8  ft.  long,  8     in.  wide,  and  8     in.  thick. 
3  sleepers,  9  ft.  "  H    "       "         "     5£    "        " 

2  planks.  10  ft.  8  in.  long,  13  "  "  "  2±  "  " 
1  plank,  7  feet  long,  13  "  "  "  2±  **  « 
lpiecejttank,2*ft.long,-18     "      "        "    2±"       « 

And  some  stakes. 

14.  Describe  the  method  of  laying  this  plat- 
form. 

To  lay  this  platform,  place  the  hurter  per- 
pendicular to  the  line  of  fire,  and  secure  it 
by  four  stakes,  one  at  each  end  and  two  in 
front,  31*  inches  from  the  middle  toward 
each  end;  lay  the  three  sleepers  parallel  to 
the  hurter,  the  first  1(3  inches  from  the  rear 
edge  of  the  hurter,  the  second  43?  inches 
from  the  rear  edge  of  the  first,  and  the  third 
43 £  inches  from  the  rear  edge  of  the  second. 
Lay  the  plank  31  \  inches  from  the  directrix 
of  the  platform  to  the  centre  of  the  plank. 
Place  the  piece  of  plank  GO  inches  from  the 
rear  edge  of  the  last  sleeper,  and  bed  it  in 
the  ground.  Place  on  the  last  sleeper  and 
this  piece  of  plank,  the  plank  (7  feet  long), 
its  front  end  106  inches  from  the  rear  edge 
of  the  hurter. 
12 


134  HAND-BOOK    OF   ARTILLERY. 

Part   XII. 
ARTILLERY  CARRIAGES  AND  MACHINES. 

1.  What  is  meant  by  artillery  carriages  ? 
Carriages  of  every  description  employed 

in  the  artillery  service. 

2.  How  are  such  carriages  classified  ? 

Into  two  general  divisions:  first,  those 
carriages  on  which  artillery  are  mounted, 
either  for  firing  or  travelling;  and  secondly, 
such  as  are  especially  used  for  the  transpor- 
tation of  artillery,  ammunition  and  stores. 

3.  What  is  a  gun-carriage  f 

It  is  the  machine  on  which  a  jnece^is 
mounted  for  manoeuvring  and  firing. 

4.  Into  what  classes  may  gun-carriages  be 
divided  ? 

Into  movable  and  stationary  carriages. 

5.  What  is  the  use  of  movable  carriages  f 
They  are  used  for  the  transportation  of 

the  pieces  as  well  as  for  firing  them,  and  are 
mounted  on  large  wheels.  They,  are  fur- 
nished with  limbers. 

6.  Describe  the  movable  carriage. 

It  consists  of  two  cheeks,  connected  to- 
gether, and  with  a  stock,  by  assembling- 
bolts.  The  front  part  supports  the  piece, 
and  rests  upon  an  axle-tree  furnished  with 
wheels,  the  rear  end  of  the  stock  or  trail 
resting  on  the  ground. 


CARRIAGES    AND    MACHINES.  135 

7.  What  are  the  cheeks  ? 

The  parts  of  the  carriage  between  which 
the  piece  is  placed,  and  upon  which  the  trun- 
nions are  supported. 

8.  What  is  the  wheel  composed  of? 

Of  a  nave  into  which  the  axle-tree  enters; 
of  a  certain  number  of  spokes  fastened  in 
the  nave;  and  a  circumference  which  is 
composed  of  a  number  of  fellies  equal  to 
half  the  number  of  spokes. 

9.  What  is  the  dish  of  a  wheel  ? 

The  inclination  outward  of  the  spokes, 
when  fastened  in  the  nave. 

10.  What  is  the  advantage  of  this  obliquity 
of  the  spokes  ? 

It  gives  elasticity  to  the  wheel,  and  pro- 
tects it  from  the  effect  of  shocks  which 
would  destroy  it,  if  the  spokes  were  in  the 
same  plane. 

11.  What  is  the  object  of  giving  dish  to  a. 
wheel  ? 

For  the  purpose  of  making  the  body  of 
the  carriage  wider;  to  diminish  the  length 
of  the  axle-tree,  thus  increasing  its  strength; 
to  throw  the  mud  and  water  outside  the 
wheels;  and  to  keep  the  wheel  close  against 
the  carriage,  and  prevent  any  tendency  to 
run  off  the  axle. 

12.  How  are  movable  gun-carriages  distin- 
guished ? 

As  tield,  mountain,  and  siege  carriages. 

13.  What  are  the  principal  considerations  to 
be  kept  in  view  in  the  construction  of  movable 
carriages  ? 


136  HANK- HOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

In  firing,  the  carriage  should  yield  to  the 
recoil.  Were  it  fixed  immovably,  it  would 
soon  he  destroyed,  no  mutter  how  great  its 

solidity.  Its  weight  should  be  proportional 
to  that  of  the  piece.  If  too  heavy,  it  would 
soon  be  destroyed  by  the  shocks  of  the  piece. 
If  too  light,  the  recoil  would  be  immoderate. 
Its  weight  should  always  be  less  than  that 
of  the  piece.  A  heavy  piece  upon  too  light 
a  carriage  will  perform  better  service  than 
the  reverse  arrangement,  since  the  effort 
exerted  by  a  piece  depends  upon  its  mass 
multiplied  into  the  square  of  the  velocity. 

14.  What  are  the  principal  considerations  to 
be  kept  in  view  in  the  construction  of  field  car- 
riages ? 

Lightness  and  strength  combined,  great 
mobilit}^  and  flexibility,  and  a  low  centre  of 
gravity,  in  order  to  surmount  all  difficulties 
in  the  field,  which  must  frequently  arise 
while  artillery  is  acting  with  other  troops, 
to  resist  the  concussion  in  firing,  and  the 
severe  jolting  produced  when  moving  rapid- 
ly over  uneven  ground. 

15.  How  many  hinds  of  field 'gun-carriages 
have  we  f 

Three,  viz :  one  for  the  6-pdr.  gun  and 
12-pdr.  howitzer;  another  for  the  24-pdr. 
howitzer;  and  the  third  for  the  12-pdr.  gun 
and  32-pdr.  howitzer. 

16.  In  ivhat  respect  are  these  carriages  simi- 
lar? 

In  all  having  the  same  kind  of  limber  and 
the  same  sized  wheels,  so  that  any  limber  or 


CARRIAGES    AND    MACHINES.  137 

wheel  may  be  used  with  any  carriage; 
though,  if  possible,  the  heaviest  wheel  (No. 
2)  should  be  used  on  the  carriages  of  the 
three  heaviest  pieces,  12-pdr.  gun  and  24  and 
32-pdr.  howitzers. 

17.  Describe  these  gun-carriages. 

The}'  consist  of  two  short  cheeks  of  wood, 
bolted  upon  a  stock  and  wooden  axle-body, 
in  a  recess  of  which  fits  the  iron  axle  on 
which  the  wheels  are  placed,  The  stock 
terminates  in  a  trail  and  trail-plate  which 
rests  on  the  ground,  and  lias  on  the  end  a 
strong  ring  called  the  lunette,  which  is  placed 
on  the  pintle-hook  when  the  piece  is  lim- 
bered. In  the  stock  is  placed  an  elevating- 
screw  box  of  bronze  in  which  the  elcvating- 
seivw  fits. 

18.  Mention  other  parts  of  a  field  carriage. 
Cap -squares,  car -plates,  trunnion*  plates, 

under-strap,  elevating-screw,  wheel  -guard 
plate,  axle-tree,  trail-plate,  trail-handles,  pro- 
longc- hooks,  pointing-rings,  washer-hooks, 
lock-chain,  sponge-chain,  sponge  and  ram- 
mer stop,  bolts,  rings,  bands,  hooks,  keys, 
straps,  nuts  and  nails. 

19.  What  is  the  limber  ? 

It  consists  of  a  similar  axle-body,  axle, 
and  two  wheels,  and  on  these  rests  a  frame- 
work to  receive  the  tongue.  On  top  of  the 
whole  is.  an  ammunition -box,  the  top  of 
which  forms  a  seat  for  three  cannoneers.  In 
rear  of  the  axle-tree  is  a  pintle-hook,  to  re- 
ceive the  lunette  of  the  trail.  Connected 
with    the    framework    in    front  is    a   fixed 


138  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

splinter -bar  with  four  hooks,  to  which  arc 
attached  the  traces  of  the  wheel-horses.  At 
the  extremity  of  the  tongue  are  placed  two 
pole-chains,  by  which  the  tongue  or  pole  is 
held  up,  and  a  pole-yoke  with  two  movable 
branches,  to  prevent,  as  much  as  possible, 
the  pole  from  oscillating  and  striking  the 
horses. 

20.  What  is  the  use  of  the  limber  ? 

To  facilitate  the  movements  of  the  car- 
riage. By  means  of  it  a  considerable  por- 
tion of  ammunition  and  stores  may  be  con- 
veyed for  the  immediate  use  of  the  piece ; 
some  of  the  cannoneers  may  be  seated  on 
the  boxes,  and,  by  the  simple  manner  in 
which  it  is  attached  to  the  carriage,  the 
greatest  facility  is  afforded  for  coming  into 
action  or  in  retiring. 

21.  Are  there  any  other  advantages  from  the 
manner  in  which  the  gun-carriage  and  limber 
are  connected  ? 

These  two  parts  thus  possess  all  the  advan- 
tages of  a  four-wheel  carriage,  and  the  free-, 
dom  of  motion  peculiar  to  each  admits  of 
their  passing  over  ground  uninjured,  or  with- 
out being  overturned  or  strained,  where  any 
other  four-wheel  carriage  would  invariably 
fail. 

22.  Describe  the  mountain  artillery  gun- 
carriage. 

It  is  formed  like  the  field  gun-carriage, 
but  much  smaller,  the  cheeks  not  being  form- 
ed of  pieces  distinct  from  the  stock,  but  all 
three  made  of  two  pieces   bolted  together. 


CARRIAGES   AND    MACHINES.  189 

The  axle-tree  is  of  wood,  which  lessens  the 
recoil,  and  gives  an  elasticity  to  the  whole 
carriage,  better  adapted  to  resist  the  shocks 
of  firing.  The  wheels  are  but  38  inches 
high.  Ordinarily,  over  rough  ground,  the 
carriage  is  transported  on  the  backs  of 
mules;  but  where  it  is  possible,  a  pair  of 
shafts  is  attached  to  the  trail  to  keep  it  from 
the  ground,  and  the  piece  is  drawn  on  its 
carriage  by  harnessing  one  of  the  pack- 
mules  to  it.  The  ammunition  is  carried  in 
ammunition-boxes  on  the  backs  of  mules. 

28.  Describe  the  prairie  carriage. 

The  necessity  for  a  small  carriage  for  the 
mountain  howitzer,  when  used  on  our  west- 
ern prairies,  has  led  to  the  adoption  of  a 
special  carriage  for  that  service,  with  a  lim- 
ber attached  as  in  a  field  carriage.  This 
renders  the  carriage  less  liable  to  overturn, 
and  preferable  in  every  respect  to  the  two- 
wheeled  one.  The  limber  is  furnished  with 
two  ammunition-boxes,  placed  over  the  axle- 
tree,  and  parallel  to -it,  and  just  wide  enough 
for  one  row  of  shells  and  their  cartridges. 

24.  How  many  kinds  of  siege  gun-carriages 
are  used  in  our  service  f 

Three :  one  for  the'  12-pdr.  gun ;  another 
for  the  18-pdr. ;  and'  the  third  for  the  24- 
pdr.  gun  and  8-in.  howitzer. 

25.  In  what  respect  are  they  similar  ? 

They  are  all  constructed  in  the  same  man- 
ner, differing  only  in  their  dimensions.  All 
the  limbers  and  wheels  are  the  same,  so  that 
they  can  be  used  in  common. 


140  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

26.    D*  scribe  this  gun-carriage. 

It  is  similar  in  its  construction  to  the  field 
carriage,  but  is  joined  to  the  limber  in  a 
differenl  way.  Projecting  upward  from  the 
limber  and  in  rear  of*the  axde-tree,  is  placed 
a  pintle,  which  enters  a  hole  made  in  the 
trail  from  the  under  side,  and  a  lashing-chain 
and  hook  keep  the  two  parts  together  when 
once  in  position.  The  weight  of  the  trail 
resting  on  the  rear  end  of  the  tongue  keeps 
this  nearly  horizontal,  and  relieves  the 
horses  of  the  weight  of  it,  which,  as  it 
must  be  both  long  and  heavy,  is  too  much 
for  the  horses  to  carry. 

The  splinter-bar  is,  as  in  field  carriages, 
stationary,  but  the  traces  of  the  next  team 
are  attached  to  a  movable  bar  which  is  con- 
nected with  the  end  of  the  tongue.  The 
tongue  is  furnished  with  pole-chains,  but  no 
yoke,  and  the  rest  of  the  teams  arc  harness- 
ed as  in  field  artillery.  The  axle-trees  are 
of  iron,  with  axle-bodies  of  wood;  which 
last,  by  its  elasticity,  renders  the  shock  from 
the  piece  less  direct  and  violent. 

On  the  upper  surface  of  the  cheeks,  near 
the  rear  ends,  are  placed  two  projecting 
bolts  which,  with  the  curve  of  the  cheeks, 
form  resting-places  for  the  trunnions,  when 
the  piece  is  in  position  for  transportation. 
They  are  called  travelling  trunnion-beds. 
WIkmi  the  piece  is  in  this  position,  its  breech 
rests  upon  the  bolster,  which  is  a  curved 
block  of  w^ood,  bolted  to  the  upper  side  of 
the   stock.     On    each  side  of  the  trail,  and 


CARRIAGES    ANL>    MACHINES.  141 

perpendicular  to  it,  a  strong  manceuvring- 
bolt  is  placed  to  serve  as  places  to  apply  the 
handspikes  in  manoeuvring  the  carriage. 

27.  What  is  the  object  of  the  travelling  trun- 
nion-beds ? 

For  the  purpose  of  distributing  the  load 
more  equally  over  the  carriage. 

28.  Mention  the  parts  composing  the  limber. 
The  fork,  the  splinter-bar.  the  hounds,  the 

sweep-bar,  the  tongue,  the  pintle,  the  lash- 
ing-chain, the  axle-tr#e  (iron).  The  sweep- 
bar  is  of  iron,  and  on  it  rests  the  trail, 
which,  by  its  weight,  keeps  op  the  tongue. 

2!).  Why  is  it  unnecessary  for  siege  carriages 
to  have  the  same  degree  of  mobility  and  flexibil- 
ity as  field  carriages  ? 

Because  siege  carriages  arc,  properly 
speaking,  transportation  wagons  for  use  on 
roads,  and  never  intended  for  manoeuvring 
with  troops. 

30.  Hoiv  many  horses  does  the  transportation 
of  siege  guns  require  ? 

A  24-pdr.  requires  ten  horses  (five  drivers); 
a  12  or  18-pdr.  eight  horses  (four  drivers). 

31.  What  are  stationary  gun-carriages  used 
for? 

To  fire  the  piece  from,  and  not  to  trans- 
port it  except  for  short  distances. 

32.  For  what  service  are  these  carriages  used  ? 

For  garrison  and  sea-coast  pieces;  al- 
though the  siege  gun-carriages  just  des- 
cribed may  also  be  used  in  a  fortification 
or  garrison.  Mortar-beds,  to  be  described 
hereafter,  are  used  either  for  siege  or  garri- 
son service. 


142  HAND-BOOK    OP    ARTILLERY. 

33.  What  are  the  chief  requisites  for  ^atri- 
sun  ,m<(  sea-coast  carriag 

Strength,  durability,  and  facility  in  serv- 
ing the  guns,  as  they  are  intended  only  for 
the  works  of  a  place,  coast  batteries,  and 
situations  where  they  are  permanently  fixed. 

84  Why  should  these  carriages  be  required 
to  possess  great  strength  and  durability  ? 

'  Unless  made  strong  they  would  soon  be 
shaken,  by  the  continued  and  rapid  fire 
which  the  defence  of  a  work  may  demand  ; 
and  from  their  constant  exposure  to  the 
weather  they  would  soon  decay,  if  made  of 
a  very  perishable  material. 

35.  7s  the  weight  of  garrison  carnages  a 
matter  of  great  importance  f 

It  is  of  less  importance  in  this  class  of 
carriages  than  in  any  other;  as  they  are  sel- 
dom removed  from  their  situations,  their 
weight  adds  but  little  to  the  labor  of  run- 
ning them  up. 

86.  Mention  the  different  stationary  car- 
riages. 

The  carriage  from  which  a  mortar  is  fired, 
called  its  bed;  the  barbette  carriage  ;  the 
columbiad  carriage;  the  casemate  carriage; 
and  that  for  the  24-pdr.  iron  howitzer,  called 
the  flank-casemate  carriage. 

37.  Mow  many  kinds  of  siege  mortar-beds 
have  we ? 

Four  :  the  8-in.,  the  10-in.,  the  stone,  tin1 
Coehorn. 

38.  Which  of  these  are  alike? 

The    first  three,  differing  only  in  dimen- 


CARRIAGES    AND    MACHINES.  143 

sions.     They  are  made   of  cast-iron,  which 
has  very  little  elasticity. 

39.  Describe  these  beds. 

They  consist  of  two  cheeks,  joined  by  two 
transoms,  all  cast  together  in  the  same  piece. 
The  manceuvring-bolts,  placed  on  each  side, 
one  near  each  end  of  the  cheeks,  are  made 
of  wrought-iron,  and  set  in  the  mould  when 
the  bed  is  cast. 

On  the  front  transom  is  fastened  a  wooden 
bolster,  grooved  to  recjeive  the  elevating 
quoin.  Notches,  on  the  underside  of  the 
front  and  rear  of  the  cheeks,  give  hold  to 
the  handspikes  in  throwing  the  carriage  to 
the  right  or  left. 

40.  Describe  the  Coehorn  mortar -bed. 

It  is  made  of  a  block  of  oak  wood,  in  one 
piece,  or  two  pieces  joined  together  with 
bolts.  A  recess  for  the  trunnions  and  part 
of  the  breech  is  made  in  the  top  of  the  bed; 
and  the  trunnions  are  kept  in  their  places  by 
plates  of  iron  bolted  down  over  them.  Two 
iron  handles  are  bolted  to  the  bed  on  each 
side,  hy  which  four  men  can  carry  the  bed 
with  the  mortar  in  its  place. 

41.  Describe  the  eprouvette  mortar-bed. 

It  consists  of  a  block  of  wood,  on  the  top 
of  which  is  countersunk  and  bolted  the  bed- 
plate, which  is  a  heavy  circular  plate  of  cast- 
iron  having  a  rectangular  recess  with  sloping 
sides,  so  as  to  make  it  longest  at  the  bottom. 
Into  this  recess  the  sole  of  the  mortar  slides. 
The  wooden  block  is  bolted  to  a  stone  block 
of  the  same  size,  which  is  firmly  placed  in 
the  ground  on  a  masonry  foundation. 


144  HAND-BOOK    OB    ARTILLERY. 

42.  Describe  the  wy.aw  sea-coast  mortar- 
bed. 

The  lied  for  the  heavy  ten-inch  mortar  is 
the  only  one  which  has  yet  been  adopted. 
The  cheeks  are  of  east-iron,  and  somewhat 
similar  in  form  to  those  in  the  beds  of  siege 
mortars;  but  in  the  front,  the  cheeks  turn 
up  to  receive  between  them  the  front  tran- 
som, which  has,  countersunk  in  and  bolted 
to  it,  an  elevating-screw  bed,  through  which 
works  an  inclined*  elevating-screw,  which 
l-ises  or  falls  by  turning  the  nut,  fitted  on  it 
by  means  of  a  lever  inserted  into  mortises 
cut  in  the  direction  of  the  radii  of  the  circu- 
lar nut. 

Both  the  transoms  are  made  of  wood,  con- 
nected with  the  cheeks  by  mortises  and  ten- 
ons, and  secured  by  bolts  running  through. 
and  nuts  on  the  outside.  One  of  these  bolts 
at  each  end  is  longer  than  the  others,  and 
the  projecting  ends  are  made  use  of  as  ma- 
nceuvring-bolts.  Directly  behind  and  under- 
neath the  position  for  the  trunnions,  a  bronze 
bed-piece  is  placed  to  receive  the  shock  of  the 
piece.  It  consists  of  a  large  beam  of  bronze, 
with  each  end  well  let  into  the  face  of  the 
cheek.  The  use  of  the  elevating-screw  in- 
stead of  the  quoin,  is  rendered  necessary  by 
the  great  mass  of  metal  to  be  raised  or  low- 
ered in  sighting  the  piece. 

43.  What  is  a  barbette  carriage? 

It  is  a  carriage  belonging  to  the  class 
denominated  immovable,  on  which  a  gun  is 
mounted  to  fire  over  a  parapet;  and  a  bar- 


CARRIAGES   AND    MACHINES.  145 

bette  gun  is  any  gun  mounted  on  a  barbette 
carriage. 

44.  How  many  forms  of  the  barbette  carriage 
are  in  use  in  the  service  ? 

Two :  one  for  iron  guns  and  sea-coast  how- 
itzers (12,  18,  24.  32,  42-pdrs.,  and  8  and 
10-in.);  and  one  for  the  columbiads. 

45.  Of  how  many  parts  are  barbette  car- 
riages composed? 

Of  a  gun-carriage  and  a  chassis. 

46.  Describe  the  gun-carriage  $ 

It  is  formed  of  two  upright  pieces  of  tim- 
ber, nearly  vertical,  behind  which  are  placed 
two  inclined  braces,  mortised  into  the  up- 
rights, and  designed  to  receive  the  force  of 
the  recoil,  the  whole  forming  the  cheeks, 
which  are  firmly  connected  and  braced  by 
transoms  and  assembling-bolts,  thus  form- 
ing a  triangular  framework,  which  is  less 
liable  than  any  other  form  to  become  de- 
formed from  the  shocks  of  the  gun.  A  hori- 
zontal piece  (the  transom  and  axle-tie)  runs 
from  front  to  rear  between  the  cheeks,  con- 
necting the  axle-body  and  rear  transom. 
The  trunnion-bed  is  at  the  top  of  the  up- 
right, where  it  is  joined  to  the  brace;  and 
the  breech  of  the  gun  is  supported  on  an 
elevating-screw,  working  into  a  screw-box 
placed  in  the  rear  end  of  the  transom  and 
axle-tie.  The  front  transom  is  just  under 
the  gun ;  the  middle  transom  is  between  the 
bract's:  and  the  rear  transom  is  at  the  lower 
end  of  the  braces,  and  under  the  transom 
and  axle-tie,  into  which  it  is  notched;  the 
13 


146  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

lower  part  of  this  transom  is  notched  to 
receive  the  tongue  of  the  chassis  <>n  which 
it  slides.  Between  this  transom  and  the 
transom  and  axle-tie,  the  end  of  a  lunette 
is  placed  projecting  to  the  rear,  and  fastened 
by  a  bolt  for  the  purpose  of  attaching  a 
limber  to  the  carriage. 

The  feet  of  the  uprights  and  front  end  of 
the  transom  and  axle-tie  are  joined  to  an 
axle-body,  in  which  an  iron  axle  is  placed. 
On  the  ends  of  the  axle  are  fitted  cast-iron 
rollers,  which  rest  on  the  rails  of  the  chassis, 
and  support  the  front  of  the  carriage.  On 
the  outside  of  the  roller  is  placed  an  octag- 
onal projection,  on  which  the  cast-iron  nave 
of  the  wheel  fits,  secured  by  a  washer  and 
linch-pin.  The  spokes  of  the  wheels  are 
wood,  inclosed  within  heavy  iron  ties.  Ma- 
nceuvring-bolts  are  inserted  in  front  of  the 
feet  of  the  uprights,  and  in  the  carriages  for 
pieces  heavier  than  a  24-pdr.,  in  rear  of  these 
feet  also.  These  bolts  and  the  spokes  of  the 
wheels  form  the  points  of  application  for  the 
handspikes,  in  manoeuvring  the  piece.  Ma- 
noeuvring-staples  are  placed  in  front  of  the 
feet  of  the  braces,  for  the  purpose  of  using 
handspikes  to  raise  the  rear  of  the  carriage 
from  the  tongue  of  the  chassis  in  running 
to  and  from  battery. 

47.  What  pieces  go  on  the  same  carriage? 
The  32-pdr.  gun  and  8-inch  howitzer.    All 

other  pieces  have  separate  carriages. 

48.  How  many  sizes  of  rollers  are  used? 
Two :  one  for  the  carriages  of  the  12,  18, 


CARRIAGES   AND    MACHINES.  147 

and  24-pdrs. ;   the  other  for  the  remaining 
carriages. 

49.  Are  cap-squares  used  with  these  car- 
riages ? 

No. 

50.  What  other  'purposes  do  the  wheels  sub- 
serve besides  assisting  in  manoeuvring  the  gun- 
carriage  ? 

In  transporting  the  piece  on  its  carriage 
for  short  distances,  as  from  one  front  of  a 
fort  to  another. 

51.  Describe  the  chassis. 

It  consists  of  two  rails  and  a  tongue,  joined 
by  three  transoms.  The  tongue  is  in  the 
middle,  and  projects  considerably  beyond 
the  rails,  to  the  rear.  At  each  end  of  the 
rails  on  top,  a  hard  piece  of  wood  is  notched 
in  and  bolted.  They  are  called  barters  and 
counter-hurters,  and  their  use  is  to  pre- 
vent the  gun-carriage  from  running  off  the 
chassis.  Kail-plates  of  iron,  to  protect  the 
wooden  rails,  are  let  into  the  outside  of  the 
rails.  At  the  rear  end  of  the  tongue,  a 
swinging  prop  is  placed  to  support  the  end 
of  the  tongue  when  the  piece  is  run  back. 
The  lower  "side  of  the  end  of  the  tongue  is 
notched  out,  and  a  manceuvring-loop  fixed 
there,  with  a  bolt  and  screws,  to  assist  in 
handling  the  chassis.  '  On  the  under  side  of 
each  rail,  opposite  the  rear  transom,  a  mor- 
tise is  formed,  for  the  reception  of  a  socket 
of  iron  which  receives  the  handle  of  the 
traverse-wheel  fork.  Each  of  these  forks 
receives  a  traverse-wheel,  joined  to  it  by  an 


148  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

axle-boll,  and  these  support  the  rear  end  of 
the  chassis.  The  front  end  is  supported  on 
a  pintle-plate  of  iron,  through  which,  and 
tip  into  the  middle  of  the  front  transom, 
passes  a  pintle  or  bolt,  which  serves  as  a 
pivot  around  which  the  whole  system  moves. 

52.  In  permanent  batteries,  how  are  the  pin- 
'(>  and  traverse-circle  fixed? 

The  pintle  is  fixed  in  a  block  of  stone,  and 
the  traverse-circle  is  an  iron  plate  set  also  in 
stone. 

53.  In  temporary  batteries,  how  is  the.  pintle 
attached  f 

To  a  wooden  bolster  which  is  covered  by 
a  circular  cast-iron  plate,  and  attached  by 
bolts  to  a  wooden  cross  picketed  firmly  into 
the  ground. 

54.  How  may  a  temporary  traverse-circle  be 
made  ? 

Of  plank,  pinned  to  sleepers,  and  fastened 
to  pickets,  or  secured  to  string-pieces,  which 
connect  the  traverse  circle  with  the  pintle 
-  cross. 
;  55.  What  retains  the  traverse-wheels  and 
tkiir  forks  in  their  places  ? 

The  weight  of  the  carriage  and  gun,  and 
ith-e  form  of  the  socket  and  handle  of  the 
:fork. 

56.  Where  are  the  handspikes  applied  in 
traversing  the  carriage  ? 

To  the  pivot-bolts  of  the  traverse-wheels, 
which  project  to  the  rear;  or  under  the 
traverse- wheels. 

57.  Why  does  the  chassis  slope  toward  the 
front  ? 


CARRIAGES    AND    MACHINES.  140 

In  order  to  diminish  the  recoil,  and  aid  in 
running  the  piece  into  battery. 

58.  Describe  the  columbiad  gun-carriage? 

It  is  a  triangular  framework,  consisting 
on  each  side  of  an  upright,  a  horizontal  rail 
or  tie,  and  a  brace,  firmly  mortised  and 
bolted  together,  forming  the  cheeks,  which 
are  joined  by  a  transom  at  each  end.  These 
project  below  the  lower  surfaces  of  the  ties, 
and  fit  in  between  the  rails  of  the  chassis, 
serving,  like  the  flanges  on  the  rollers  in 
the  other  barbette  carriages,  to  prevent  the 
gun-carriage  from  slipping  sideways  off  the 
chassis. 

Through  the  front  transom,  and  near  the 
front  ends  of  the  ties,  an  iron  axle-tree  is 
passed,  working  in  iron  boxes  fitting  in  the 
ties.  On  the  projecting  ends  of  this  axle- 
tree  the  rollers  or  manoeuvring-wheels  are 
fixed  (the  axis  of  which  are  eccentric  with 
the  axis  of  the  axle-tree),  the  extreme  ends 
of  the  axle  being  octagonal  in  shape,  to  fit 
the  wrench  of  the  iron  handspike. 

These  eccentrics  are  so  arranged  that  when 
the  centres  of  the  wheels  are  at  their  lowest 
points,  the  surfaces  of  the  wheels  bear  on 
the  rails  of  the  chassis  and  raise  the  gun- 
carriage  tie  from  it ;  and  when  the  centres 
are  at  the  highest  points,  the  surfaces  of  the 
wheels  do.  not  touch  the  rails,  and  the  ties 
are  in  contact  with  them.*     A  similar   ar- 

*  A  couple  of  notches  or  indentations  are  made  on  the 
ends  of  the  eccentric  axles.  When  these  notches  are  in  a 
vertical  line,  the  wheels  rest  on  the  rails  ;  but  when  they 
are  in  a  horizontal  or  inclined  line,  the  ties  rest  on  them. 


150  HAND-BOOK    OF   ARTILLERY. 

rangement  is  made  for  the  rear  part  of  the 
carriage,  except  that  the  axle  does  ftot  ex- 
tend all  the  way  through,  but  the  wheel  on 
each  side  has  a  projecting  piece  of  axle 
which  works  into  a  box  placed  near  the  end 
of  the  tie. 

The  wheel  is  thrown  into  or  out  of  gear, 
that  is,  made  to  bear  on  the  rail  of  the  chas- 
sis, or  relieved  from  it,  by  turning  the  axle 
with  a  wrench  placed  on  the  octagonal  end. 
In  the  direction  of  the  radii  of  the  wheels, 
but  inclined  outward,  mortises  are  placed 
for  the  reception  of  the  end  of  the  iron 
handspikes,  by  acting  on  which,  while  in- 
serted, the  wheels  are  turned,  and  the  car- 
riage moved  back  and  forth  on  the  chassis. 
Ordinarily,  when  the  wheels  are  thrown  into 
gear,  the  carriage  being  back,  it  will  run 
into  battery  of  itself. 

The  elevating  arrangement  consists  of  an 
elevating-screw,  working  into  a  screw-bed, 
which  slides  in  a  vertical  box,  and  carries 
on  the  top  of  it  a  movable  pawl  to  fit  into 
the  notches  cut  in  the  breech  of  the  gun,  in 
order  to  give  considerable  elevations.  For 
the  purpose  of  transferring  the  pawl  from 
one  notch  to  the  next,  it  has  a  slit  in  it, 
through  which  the  elevating-bar  is  passed; 
and  the  gun  supported  by  making  use  of  the 
edge  of  the  elevating-box  as  a  fulcrum. 
This  arrangement  is  over  the  rear  transom. 

59.  Describe  the  chassis  of  the  columbiad 
carriage. 

It  consists,  like  those  used  with  other  bar- 


CARRIAGES   AND    MACHINES.  151 

bette  carriages,  of  two  rails  connected  by 
three  transoms;  but  the  tops  of  the  rails 
are  shod  with  iron  plates,  and  the  rear  hurt- 
ers  are  the  large  heads  of  heavy  bolts  which 
pass  entirely  through  the  rails.  The  front 
hurters  are  fixed  to  the  front  transom  by  a 
heavy  plate  and  bolt. 

Traverse-wheels  are  placed  under  both 
front  and  rear  transoms,  and  the  chassis 
moves  on  a  pintle  passing  through  the  mid- 
dle transom.  Two  of  these  wheels  are  placed 
under  each  end  of  the  chassis,  their  axes 
being  kept  in  place  by  straps  bolted  to  the 
transoms.  Recesses  are  cut  in  the  under  side 
of  the  transom  for  the*  wheels  to  turn  in. 
This  chassis  has  no  tongue. 

60.  Of  how  many  parts  are  casemate  car- 
riages composed  f 

Like  barbette  carriages,  of  a  gun-carriage 
and  chassis. 

61.  Describe  the  gun-carriage. 

It  consists  of  two  cheeks,  joined  together 
by  as  many  transoms,  and  supported  in  front 
by  an  axle-tree  on  truck  wheels,  and  in  rear 
on  the  rear  transom,  which  is  notched  to  fit 
t\ie  tongue  of  the  chassis.  Each  cheek  is 
formed  of  two  pieces,  one  on  top  of  the 
other,  and  connected  by  dowels  and  bolts. 
On  the  under  side,  near  the  front,  a  notch  is 
cut  for  the  reception  of  the  axle-tree,  which 
is  of  oak;  and  nearly  over  the  axle,  on  the 
upper  side  of  the  cheek,  the  trunnion-bed  is 
placed.  The  rear  of  the  upper  piece  of  the 
cheek  is  cut  into  steps,  which  give  a  better 


152  HAND-BOOK    OF   ARTILLERY. 

hold  for  the  assembling-bolts  than  a  uniform 
slope,  and  give  purchases  for  the  handspikes 
in  elevating  the  piece.  On  the  inside  of 
each  cheek,  just  in  rear  of  the  axle,  a  verti- 
cal guide  is  fixed  to  keep  the  carriage  oq  the 
chassis.  It  is  of  wood,  and  bolted  to  the 
front  transom  and  axle-tree.  The  top  of  the 
front  transom  is  hollowed  out,  to  admit  the 
depression  of  the  piece.  Behind  the  rear 
transom  and  at  the  notch  cut  in  it,  there  is 
an  eccentric  roller,  so  arranged  as  to  bear 
the  weight  of  the  rear  part  of  the  carriage, 
or  not,  according  as  it  is  thrown  in  or  out  of 
gear. 

Near  the  rear  end  of  each  cheek,  and  out- 
side, a  heavy  trail-handle  of  iron  is  placed, 
and  used  in  manoeuvring  the  piece.  On  the 
ends  of  the  axle  truck  wheels  are  placed, 
with  mortises  sloping  outward  in  the  direc- 
tion of  the  radii,  for  the  insertion  of  the 
handspikes  in  running  from  batteiy. 

The  elevating  apparatus  consists  of  a  cast- 
iron  bed-plate,  secured  to  the  rear  transom; 
an  elevating-screw  and  brass  nut;  the  nut 
being  acted  on  by  an  oblique-toothed  wheel, 
turned  by  a  handle  placed  outside  the  right 
cheek. 

62.   Describe  the  chassis. 

It  consists  of  two  rails  and  a  tongue, 
joined  by  two  transoms,  and  supported  on 
traverse-wheels  in  front  and  rear.  The  track 
on  each  rail  is  curved  up  at  each  end,  and 
provided  with  hurters  to  prevent  the  car- 
riage from  running  off  the  chassis.     A  prop, 


CARRIAGES   AND    MACHINES.  153 

fastened  under  the  rear  end  of  the  tongue, 
prevents  the  chassis  from  upsetting  back- 
ward in  firing  heavy  charges,  and  may  be 
used  as  a  point  of  support  in  raising  the 
chassis.  An  iron  fork  is  bolted  to  the  under- 
side of  the  front  end  of  the  tongue,  to  which 
is  bolted  an  iron  tongue.  An  opening  in  the 
masonry  below  the  embrasure  is  left  for  this 
tongue,  and  it  is  secured  in  its  place  by 
dropping  the  pintle  from  the  embrasure  down 
through  the  eye  of  the  tongue. 

G3.  Where  is  the  flank-casemate  carriage 
employed  ? 

It  is  especially  adapted  to  the  mounting  of 
the  24-pdr.  iron  howitzer  in  the  flanks  of 
Casemate  batteries,  for  defending  the  ditch; 
and  both  the  gun-carriage  and  chassis  are 
narrower  and  lighter  than  the  other  case- 
mate carriages. 

64.  Describe  the  gun-carriage. 

The  cheeks  are  made  of  white  oak,  and 
connected  by  two  iron  transoms,  the  front 
one  projecting  below  the  cheeks,  and  resting 
on  the  chassis  with  a  projection  on  the  bot- 
tom of  it,  fitting  in  between  the  rails.  The 
bottom  of  the  trail  has  the  same  slope  as  the 
upper  surface  of  the  chassis  on  which  it 
rests ;  so  that  when  its  eccentric  roller  is  out 
of  gear,  the  rear  parts  of  the  cheek  fit  the 
rails.  The  remaining  portion  of  the  bottom 
of  the  cheek  makes  an  angle  with  the  rail, 
and  has  in  front  a  fork,  and  a  roller  which 
runs  on  the  rail  of  the  chassis  when  the 
eccentric  is  in  gear.     Each  cheek  has  on  the 


154  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

side  a  trail-handle  and  a  manrauvring-ring. 

In  rear  of  the  rear  transom  is  placed  an  eccen- 
tric roller,  having  a  projection  in  the  middle 
of  it  just  large  enough  to  fit  in  between  the 
rails  of  the  chassis,  and  guide  the  trail  of 
the  carriage.  When  this  roller  is  in  gear, 
the  weight  of  the  trail  rests  upon  it,  while 
that  of  the  front  part  of  the  carriage  is 
thrown  upon  the  front  rollers,  and  the  piece 
is  then  easily  run  in  and  out  of  battery;  but 
the  roller  being  out  of  gear,  as  when  the 
piece  is  about  to  be  fired,  the  weight  rests 
upon  the  rear  part  of  the  cheeks  and  the 
front  transom,  and  friction  is  brought  into 
play  to  diminish  the  recoil.  Cap-squares 
are  used  with  this  carriage. 

65.  Describe  the  chassis. 

It  consists  simply  of  two  rails  3  in.  apart, 
and  joined  by  four  transoms  and  assembling- 
bolts.  Hurters  on  the  rear  ends  of  the  rails 
only  are  used,  as  the  bottom  projection  of 
the  front  transom  prevents  the  carriage  run- 
ning too  far  into  battery.  The  front  end  of 
the  chassis  rests  on  the  sole  of  the  embra- 
sure. The  end  is  provided  with  a  pintle- 
plate,  and  a  strap  of  half-inch  iron  through 
which  the  pintle  passes  to  the  masonry  be- 
neath. The  rear  of  the  chassis  is  supported 
by  an  iron  prop,  the  lower  end  of  which  is 
attached  to  two  traverse-wheels. 

66.  What  kind  of  carriages  have  been  rec- 
ommended for  use  in  garrisons,  instead  of 
wooden  ones  ? 

Wi-ou ght-iron  carriages,  all  made  in  a  sim- 


CARRIAGES   AND    MACHINES.  155 

ilar  manner,  differing  only  in  weight   and 
dimensions. 

67.  What  is  the  objection  to  cast-iron? 

Its  weight,  and  its  great  liability  to  splin- 
ter when  struck  by  shot. 

68.  Of  how  many  parts  is  the  lorought-iron 
carriage  comjiosed  ? 

Like  the  wooden  ones  of  a  gun-carriage 
and  chassis. 

69.  Describe  the  gun-carriage. 

It  consists  of  two  cheek-plates  of  thick 
sheet-iron,  each  one  of  which  is  stiffened  by 
three  trough-beams,  termed  braces,  bolted 
on  the  inside  of  the  cheeks.  Along  the  bot- 
tom of  each  cheek  an  iron  shoe  is  fastened 
by  pieces  of  angle  iron,  bolted  to  the  cheeks 
and  the  shoe.  This  shoe  is  bent  upward  at 
both  ends,  in  front  being  bolted  to  the  flange 
of  the  front  brace,  and  in  rear  to  the  flange 
of  the  rear  brace.  The  rear  bent  portion  is 
longer,  and  terminated  at  top  by  another 
bend  at  right  angles,  which  serves  as  a  point 
of  application  for  a  lever. 

The  trunnion-plates  rest  on  the  top  ends 
of  the  braces,  being  secured  to  them  through 
their  flanges  by  movable  bolts  and  nuts. 

The  cheek-plates  are  assembled  together 
by  transoms  made  of  bar-iron  bent  at  both 
ends,  and  bolted  to  the  cheek-plates  through 
the  braces.  The  cheek-plates  are  parallel 
to  each  other. 

The  carriage  is  supported  in  front  on  an 
axle-tree  with  truck  wheels,  in  a  similar 
manner  to  the  wooden  casemate  carriage.   ' 


156  HAND-BOOK   OF   ARTILLERY. 

70.  Describe  the  chassis  ? 

It  consists  of  two  rails  of  wrought-iron, 
the  cross  section  of  each  being  in  the  form 
of  an  I.  The  rails  are  parallel  to  each 
other,  and  connected  by  iron  transoms  and 
brace-. 

In  the  8  and  10-in.  colnmbiad  and  bar- 
bette carriages,  the  middle  transom  is  of 
wood  strengthened  by  iron  plates  and  bolts. 

The  chassis  is  supported  on  traverse- 
wheels. 

A  prop  is  placed  under  the  rails  to  prevent 
sagging. 

71.  What  carriage  is  used  for  conveying 
ammunition  for  a  field  battery  f 

The  caisson. 

72.  Describe  it. 

A  four-wheeled  carriage,  consisting  of  two 
parts,  one  of  which  is  a  limber  similar  to 
that  of  the  gun-carriage,  and  connected  in  a 
similar  way  by  a  wooden  stock  and  lunette. 

On  the  axle-body  of  the  rear  part,  and 
parallel  to  the  stock,  are  placed  three  rails 
upon  which  are  fastened  two  ammunition- 
boxes,  one  behind  the  other,  and  similar  to 
the  one  on  the  limber;  so  that  the  caisson 
has  three  ammunition-boxes  which  will  seat 
nine  cannoneers.  The  interior  compart- 
ments of  the  ammunition-boxes  vary  ac- 
cording to  the  nature  of  the  ammunition 
with  which  they  are  loaded.  In  rear  of  the 
last  box  is  placed  a  spare  wheel  axle  of  iron, 
with  a  chain  and  toggle  at  the  end  of  it. 
On  the  rear  end  of  the  middle  rail  is  placed 


CARRIAGES   AND    MACHINES.  157 

a  carriage-hook,  similar  to  a  pintle-hook,  to 
which  the  lunette  of  a  gun-carriage  whose 
limber  has  become  disabled  may  be  attached, 
and  the  gun  carried  off  the  field. 

The  caisson  has  the  same  turning  capacity 
and  mobility  as  the  gun-carriage,  so  that  it 
can  follow  the  piece  in  all  its  manoeuvres,  if 
necessary.  It  also  carries  a  spare  wheel, 
spare  pole,  etc. 

73.  What  provision  is  made  for  repairing 
the  carriages  of  a  field  battery  when  required? 

Every  field  battery   is   provided    with   a 

FORGE. 

74.  Describe  this  wagon. 

It  consists,  besides  the  limber,  of  a  frame- 
work on  which  is  fixed  the  bellows,  lire- 
place,  etc.  Behind  the  bellows  is  placed  a 
coal-box,  which  has  to  be  removed  before 
the  bellows  can  be  put  in  position.  In  the 
limber- box  are  placed  the  smiths'  tools, 
horse-shoes,  nails,  and  spare  parts  (iron)  of 
carriages,  harness,  etc. 

75.  Describe  the  battery-wagon. 

It  consists,  besides  the  limber,  of  a  long- 
bodied  cart  with  a  round  top,  which  is  con- 
nected with  the  limber  in  the  same  way  as 
all  other  field  carriages.  The  lid  opens  on 
hinges  placed  at  the  side ;  and  in  rear  is 
fixed  a  movable  forage -rack  for  carrying 
long  forage.  One  of  these  wagons  accom- 
panies each  field  battery,  for  the  purpose  of 
transporting  carriage  makers'  and  saddlers' 
tools,  spare" parts  of  carriages,  harness  and 
14 


158  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

equipments  and  rough  materials  for  replac- 
ing differenl  parts. 

Both  this  and  the  forge  arc  made  of  equal 
mobility  with  the  other  field  carriages,  in 
order  to  accompany  them  wherever  they 
may  be  required  to  go. 

76.  How  many  kinds  of  wheels  are  employed 
for  fit  Id  carriages  ? 

Two:  No.  1  for  the  6-pdr.  gun-carriage, 
the  caisson,  the  forge,  the  battery-wagon, 
and  for  the  limbers  of  all  field  carriages; 
No.  2  for  the  S4-pdr.  howitzer  and  the 
12-pdr.  gun-carriages. 

77.  In  what  respects  are  these  wheels  similar? 
They  are  of  the  same  form  and  height, 

and  they  fit  on  the  same  -axle-tree  arm.  The 
height  is  57  inches,  and  each  wheel  is  com- 
posed of  14  spokes  and  7  fellies. 

78.  How  do  they  differ  f 

In  the  dimensions  of  their  parts,  and  in 
strength  and  weight. 

79.  What  is  the  weight  of  these  wheels  ? 
No.  1,  180  lbs;  No.  2,  196  lbs. 

80.  What  is  the  weight  and  It  right  of  a  wheel 
of  siege  gun-carriages  and  limbers  ? 

Weight  401  lbs.,  and  height  60  inches. 

81.  What  is  the  portable  forge  designed 
for? 

Service  in  a  mountainous  country,  where 
wheeled  vehicles  cannot  travel,  for  the  pur- 
pose of  making  repairs,  not  only  for  the  ar- 
tillery, but  for  all  other  arms  of  service  taken 
on  such  expeditions. 

82.  What  is  the  mortar-wagon  designed 
for? 


CARRIAGES    AND    MACHINES.  159 

The  transportation  of  siege  mortars  and 
their  beds,  or  of  guns  or  large  shot  and  shells. 

83.  Describe  this  wagon. 

The  limber  and  wheels  are  the  same  as 
those  of  the  siege  gun-carriage.  The  body 
consists  of  a  platform  of  rails  and  transoms, 
resting  on  an  axle-tree,  the  two  middle  rails 
being  prolonged  to  form  the  stock  j  six 
stakes  or  standards  are  inserted  in  sockets 
on  the  side  of  this  platform,  and  used  to  se- 
cure the  load. 

The  side  rails  are  prolonged  to  the  rear, 
and  furnish  pivots  for  a  roller  placed  imme- 
diately in  rear  of  the  platform.  This  roller 
has  holes  for  the  insertion  of  handspikes, 
and  is  used  in  loading  the  wagon ;  the  guns, 
mortars,  etc.,  being  drawn  up  on  the  stock. 

A  muzzle-bolster  on  the  stock  near  the 
limber,  and  a  breech-hurter  near  the  hind 
part  of  the  wagon,  are  provided  and  used 
when  long  pieces  are  transported  on  it. 

Mortars  are  usually  carried  mounted  on 
their  beds. 

84.  What  is  the  use  of  the  handcart  ? 

For  the  transportation  of  light  stores  in 
siege  and  garrison  service. 

85.  Describe  it. 

It  consists  of  a  light  body  with  shafts, 
mounted  on  two  wheels.  The  shafts  are 
joined  together  at  the  ends,  and  supported 
immediately  in  front  of  the  body  by  iron 
legs. 

86.  What  is  the  use  of  the  hand  sling-cart  ? 
It  is  used  in  siege  and  garrison  service  for 

transporting  artillery  short  distances. 


160  HAND-BOOK   OP   ARTILLERY. 

87.  Describe  it. 

It  is  a  two-wheeled  carriage,  made  entirely 
of  iron,  except  the  pole,  which  is  of  oak.  The 
axle-tree  is  arched  to  make  it  stranger,  and 
connected  with  the  pole  by  strong  wrougbtr 
iron  straps  and  bra6es.  In  tin1  rear  of  the 
axle  a  projection  is  welded  to  receive  the 
end  of  a  strong  hook.  The  end  of  the  pole 
terminates  in  a  ferule  and  an  eye.  The  eye 
is  for  the  purpose  of  attaching  to  the  cart, 
when  necessary,  a  limber  or  a  horse. 

88.  How  great  weights  can  be  transported  by 
this  cart  ? 

It  should  not  be  used  with  heavier  weights 
than  about  4,000  lbs.,  but  in  case  of  necessity 
a  24  or  32-pdr.  gun  may  be  transported  on 
it.  For  heavier  guns  or  material,  the  large 
sling-cart,  drawn  by  horses  or  oxen,  should 
be  used. 

89.  What  is  the  field  and  siege  gin  and 
its  u§e  ? 

It  consists,  like  all  gins,  of  two  legs  and  a 
pry -pole,  a  windlass,  sheaves,  pulleys,  and  a 
fall  or  rope,  and  is  used  for  mounting  or 
handling  guns,  or  other  heavy  bodies,  in  the 
field  or  in  the  trenches  .of  a  siege.  The  legs 
are  about  14i  feet  long,  and  the  height  of  the 
gin  about  12  feet. 

90.  How  does  the  garrison  gin  differ  from 
the  field  and  siege  gin  ? 

It  is  heavier  and  stronger,  as  it  is  used  for 
mounting  heavier  guns,  and  has  not  to  be 
transported  like  the  other  with  an  army  in 


CARRIAGES   AND   MACHINES.  161 

the  field.  The  legs  are  longer  and  the  gin 
higher  than  the  other. 

91.  Describe  the  casemate  CxiN. 

It  does  not  differ  from  the  garrison  gin 
except  in  its  height  (which  is  about  that  of 
the  field  and  siege  gin)  and  the  thickness 
and  strength  of  the  parts. 


HAND-BOO 


162  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 


Part  XIII. 
PRACTICAL  GUNNERY. 

1.  How  may  the  initial  velocity  of  a  shot  or 
shell  be  ascertained  ? 

Approximately  by  the  empirical  formula. 

F=160oJ^ 

Where  F=initial  velocity. 

«=a  coefficient,  whose  value  de- 
pends on  the  windage. 
c=charge  }  .     ,, 

^weight  of  ball    }  m  1DS' 
The  values  of  a  are  : 

Windage.  Values  of  a. 

0.175         ....         3.6 
0.125  .         .  .     4.4 

0.090         ....         5.0    " 

2.  Does  a  shot  or  shell  continue  at  the  same 
uniform  velocity  during  its  flight  ? 

The  velocity  decreases  as  the  distance  in- 
creases, in  a  proportion  a  little  higher  than 
the  squares  of  the  velocities  throughout. 

3.  What  causes  a  decrease  in  the  velocity  of 
a  shot  ? 

The  resistance  of  the  air,  which  varies  as 
the  square  of  the  velocity  of  the  shot. 

4.  With   balls   of  different   dia?neters,   and 


PRACTICAL   GUNNERY.  163 

equal  velocities,  to  what  is  the  resistance  of  the 
air  proportional  f 

Their  surfaces,  or  the  squares  of  their 
diameters. 

5.  Would  the  velocity  of  the  shot  be  increased 
by  lengthening  the  gun  ? 

Only  up  to  a  certain  point;  in  a  proportion 
which  is  nearly  the  mean  ratio  between  the 
square  and  cube  roots  of  the  length  of  the 
bore.  It  is  found  that  the  velocity  given  by 
long  guns  is  reduced  to  an  equality  with  that 
of  short  guns  within  a  short  distance  from 
the  muzzle  when  fired  with  similar  charges. 

6.  Would  the  velocity  of  a  shot  be  increased 
by  entirely  preventing  the  recoil,  or  by  adding 
greatly  to  the  weight  of  the  gun? 

In  neither  case  would  any  sensible  effect 
be  produced  on  the  velocity. 

7.  Would  the  velocity  of  the  shot  be  increased 
by  using  a  larger  charge  of  powder  f 

Only  to  a  certain  point,  peculiar  to  each 
gun;  by  further  increasing  the  charge,  the 
velocity  would  be  gradually  diminished;  yet 
the  recoil  is  always  increased  by  an  increase 
of  charge. 

8.  What  is  the  ratio  of  the  velocities  of  shot, 
when  of  different  weights  but  fired  with  sim- 
ilar charges  ? 

The  velocities  are  inversely  as  the  square- 
roots  of  their  weights. 

9.  What  is  the  ratio  of  the  velocities  of  shot 
of  equal  weights  when  fired  with  different 
cha rges  of  p o  wder  ? 

The  velocities  are  directly  as  the  square- 
roots  of  the  charges. 


164  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

10.  How  may  the  velocity  be  increased 
out  augmenting  the  charge  of  powder? 

V>y  decreasing  the  windage;  the  loss  of 
velocity  by  a  given  windage  being  directly 
as  the  windage.  From  |  to  r'3  is  lost  by  a 
windage  of  ^  diameter. 

11.  What  is  meant  by  the  time  of  flight  of 
a  shot  or  shell  ? 

The  time  during  which  it  is  passing 
through  the  air  from  the  piece  to  the  first 
graze. 

12.  When  firing  with  common  shells  at  45° 
elevation,  how  is  the  time  of  flight  found? 

Extract  the  square  root  of  the  range  in 
feet  and  divide  by  4;  or  divide*  the  range 
in  feet  by  16,  and  extract  the  square-root  of 
this  quotient. 

Note. — Range  in  feet=igi2X cotangent  elevation. 
=16f2x cotangent  elevation. 
=16/2  where  the  elevation  is  45°. 


Or  t=i]/  range  in  feet  for  elevation  45°. 

13.  Having  the  time  of  flight,  how  is  the 
range  ascertained? 

Multiply  the  square  of  the  time  of  flight 
by  16  for  the  range  in  feet  (the  elevation 
being  45°). 

14.  What  is  meant  by  the  penetration  of  'pro- 
jectiles? 

The  depth  to  which  they  are  forced  when 
fired  into  any  resisting  medium. 

15.  Give  the  law  of  penetration  of  balls. 
The  penetration  of  balls  of  the  same  size, 

with  different  velocities  or  charges,  is  nearly 
as  the  squares  of  the  velocities;  where  the 


PRACTICAL   GUNNERY.  165 

balls  are  of  different  sizes,  the  penetration 
will*  be  proportionate  to  their  diameters  mul- 
tiplied by  the  density,  and  inversely  as  the 
tenacity  of  the  medium. 

16.  Mention  the  depth  of  penetration  in  case 
of  the  2-i-pdr.  siege  gun. 

At  100  yards  a  24-pdr.  ball  with  a  charge 
of  one-third  of  its  weight  will  penetrate  as 
follows: 

Feet.       Inches. 

In  earth  of  old  parapets,       .     .     8  6 

"      "      recently  thrown  up,     .15  0 

"  Oak  wood,  sound  and  hard,       4  6 

"  Rubble  stone  masonry,      .     .     1  10 

"  Brick, 3  0 

17.  What  is  the  depth  of  penetration  of  shot 
fired  from  field  pieces  ? 

Fired  at  the  distance  of  500  or  600  yards, 
the  penetration  will  be  from  4?  to  6  feet  in 
parapets  recently  constructed,  and  will  tra- 
verse walls  of  ordinary  construction;  but  a 
13-pdr.  is  necessary  to  make  a  breach  in 
walls  of  good  masonry  and  of  4  feet  in  thick- 
ness, and  in  this  case  the  position  of  the  bat- 
tery must  be  favorable  and  the  operation  a 
slow  one. 

18.  In  attacking  a  post  or  fortified  position, 
in  what  manner  should  the  fire  from  artillery 
be  carried  on? 

Previous  to  an  assault,  the  artillery  ought 
to  support  the  other  troops  by  a  combined 
fire  of  guns,  howitzers  and  small  mortars, 
so  that,  if  possible,  the  fire  may  be  simul- 
taneous, as   such  a  diversity  of  projectiles 


166  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

would  tend  to  distract  the  defenders  and 
prevent  them  from  extinguishing  anv  fire 
among  buildings,  besides  throwing  them  into 
confusion  at  the  moment  of  assault.  In 
eases  of  surprise,  when  immediate  action  is 
required,  the  above  method  cannot,  of  course, 
be  practicable. 

19.  When  firing  guns  of  different  calibres  at 
long  ranges,  what  are  the  probabilities  of  hitting 
the  object  ? 

As  the  squares  of  the  diameters  of  their 
respective  shot,  when  of  equal  density,  and 
fired  with  proportional  charges. 


MISCELLANEOUS.  167 


Part  XIV. 
MISCELLANEOUS. 

1.  What  is  the  velocity  of  sound  in  the  air  f 
At  the  temperature  of  33°  the  mean  velo- 
city of  sound  is  1,100  feet  in  a  second.     It  is 
increased  or  diminished  half  a  foot  for  each 
degree  of  temperature  above  or  below  33°. 

2.  How  can  the  distance  of  an  object  be  ascer- 
tained by  the  report  of  fire-arms? 

By  observing  the  number  of  seconds  that 
elapse  between  the  flash  and  the  report  of  a 
gun,  and  multiplying  the  number  by  the 
velocity  of  sound  in  the  air. 

3.  What  is  momentum  ? 

The  force  possessed  by  a  body  in  motion ; 
and  is  measured  by  the  product  of  the  mass 
of  the  body  into  its  velocity. 

4.  When  equal  masses  are  in  motion,  what 
proportion  do  their  momenta  bear  to  their  veloci- 
ties f 

They  are  proportional  to  their  velocities. 

5.  When  velocities  are  equal,  what  proportion 
do  their  momenta  bear  to  their  masses  ? 

They  are  proportional  to  their  masses. 

6.  What  proportion  do  the  momenta  bear  to 
each  other  when  neither  the  masses  nor  velocities 
are  equal  ? 

They  are  to  each  other  as  the  products  of 


168  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

their    masses    into    their    velocities   respec- 
tively. 

7.  What  is  the  average  weight  of  a  horsi 
About  1,000  pounds. 

8.  What  space  does  a  horse  occupy  in  the 
ran/;*  ;  in  a  stall ;  and  at  a  picket  ? 

In  the  ranks,  a  front  of  40  in.,  a  depth  of 
10  feet;  in  a  stall,  from  3$  to  4£  feet  front; 
at  picket,  3  feet  by  9. 

9.  What  are  the  comparative  effects  of  the 
labor  of  a  man,  and  that  of  a  horse  or  mule  ? 

Taking  the  useful  effect  of  a  man's  daily 
labor  as  unity,  a  horse  can  carry  a  load  on  a 
horizontal  plane  4.8  to  6.1  times;  and  a  mule 
7.6  times  greater  than  a  man.  Taking  a 
man  with  a  wheelbarrow  as  unity,  a  horse 
in  a  four-wheel  wagon  can  draw  17.5,  and  in 
a  cart  24.3 ;  and  a  mule  in  a  cart  23.3  times 
greater  burden. 

10.  What  weight  is  an  artillery  horse  re- 
quired to  draw  ? 

Not  more  than  700  lbs.,  the  weight  of  the 
carriage  included. 

11.  What  weight  can  a  team  of  four  horses 
or  more  draw  with  useful  effect  ? 

Including  the  weight  of  carriage,  4  horses 
can  draw  24  cwt.,  or  6  each;  6  horses,  30 
cwt.,  5  each;  8  horses,  36  cwt.,  4$  each;  and 
12  horses,  48  cwt.,  or  4  each.  It  is  usual  to 
estimate  the  weight  of  a  carriage  exceeding 
12  cwt.  as  part  of  the  load. 

12.  What  weights  are  carried  by  the  riding, 
pack,  and  draught  horses  respectively  ? 

A  horse  carrying  a  soldier  and  his  equip- 


MISCELLANEOUS.  169 

ments  (say  225  lbs.)  travels  25  miles  in  a 
day  (8  hours) ;  a  pack-horse  can  carry  250 
to  300  lbs.  20  miles  a  day  j  and  a  draught- 
horse,  1,600  lbs.  23  miles  a  day,  weight  of 
carriage  included. 

13.  What  are  the  usual  paces  for  horses  in 
the  artillery  ? 

Walk,  trot  and  gallop;  the  last  is  seldom 
necessary. 

14.  What  is  considered  an  ordinary  day's 
march  for  field  artillery,  and  rate  of  motion? 

An  ordinary  march  is  about  15  miles  at  2£ 
miles  per  hour  for  6  hours;  this  must  depend 
upon  the  condition  of  the  horses,  state  of 
the  roads,  and  various  other  circumstances. 
Horses  starting  fresh,  and  resting  after  their 
work,  may,  on  tolerable  roads,  perform  2 
miles  in  half  an  hour;  4  miles  in  1£  hours; 
8  in  4,  and  16  in  10  hours. 

15.  What  is  the  rate  of  march  of  horse-artil- 
lery and  cavalry? 

Walk,  3f  miles  per  hour,  or  1  mile  in  16 
minutes;  trot,  7£  per  hour,  or  1  mile  in  8 
minutes  ;  manoeuvring  gallop,  at  the  rate  of 
11  miles  per  hour,  or  1  mile  in  5^  minutes; 
cavalry  charge,  24  miles  an  hour,  or  at  the 
rate  of  1  mile  in  2$  minutes. 

16.  At  what  rate  does  infantry  march  ? 

In  common  time,  90  steps==70  yards  in  1 
minute,  or  2  miles  680  yards  in  an  hour;  in 
quick  time,  110  steps=86  yards  in  1  minute, 
or  2  miles  1,613  yards  in  an  hour;  in  double- 
quick,  140  steps=109  yards  in  1  minute,  or 
3  miles  1,253  yards  in  an  hour. 
15 


170  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

17.  What  space  does  afoot  soldier,  occupy  in 
the  ranks,  and  what  is  his  average  weight  f 

A  front  of  20  in.,  and  a  depth  of  13  in., 
without  the  knapsack;  the  interval  between 
the  rank's  is  13  in.;  5  men  can  stand  in  a 
Space  of  1  square  yard.  Average  weight  of 
men,  150  lbs.  each. 

18.  What  is  the  daily  allowance  of  water  for 
a  man  ? 

One  gallon,  for  all  purposes. 

19.  What  is  it  for  a  horse  ? 
Four  gallons. 

20.  What  is  the  weight  of  a  bushel  of  oats ; 
or  of  wheat ;  and  the  weight  of  hay  ? 

40  lbs.,  or  32.14  lbs.  to  the  cubic  foot,  in 
case  of  oats  j  60  lbs.  to  the  bushel,  or  48.21 
lbs.  to  the  cubic  foot,  in  case  of  wheat;  hay 
pressed  in  bundles  weighs  11  lbs.  per  cubic 
foot. 

21.  What  weight  does  an  infantry  soldier 
carry  when  in  marching  order  f 

About  45  lbs.  in  all.  His  knapsack  when 
packed  weighs  24  lbs. ;  canteen  when  filled, 
and  one  day's  provisions  in  haversack,  5  lbs.; 
rifle-musket,  sling  and  bayonet,  10 £  lbs. ; 
belts  complete,  including  20  rounds  of  am- 
munition, 6  lbs. 

22.  How  is  the  area  of  a  circle  found  ? 
Square    the   diameter,    and   multiply   by 

.7854  for  the  area ;  or  square  the  circumfer- 
ence, and  multiply  by  .07958  for  the  same 
result. 

23.  How  is  the  content  of  a  conical  frustum 
found f 


MISCELLANEOUS.  171 

Add  into  one  sum  the  areas  of  the  two 
ends  and  the  mean  proportional  between 
them ;  take  one-third  of  that  sum  for  the 
mean  area,  and  multiply  it  by  the  perpen- 
dicular height  of  the  frustum  for  its  con- 
tent. 

24.  How  is  the  mean  proportional  found  for 
the  above  ? 

By  multiplying  the  areas  of  the  two  ends 
together  and  extracting  the  square-root  of 
their  product.  A  more  simple  rule  is  the 
following  :  As  the  diameter  of  the  large  end 
is  to  that  of  the  small  end,  so  is  area  of  base 
to  mean  proportional  required. 

25.  How  is  the  content  of  a  spherical  segment 
found  ? 

From  three  times  the  diameter  of  the 
sphere  take  double  the  height  of  the  seg- 
ment, then  multiply  the  remainder  by  the 
square  of  the  height,  and  this  product  by 
.5236 ;  or,  to  three  times  the  square  of  the 
radius  of  the  segment's  base  add  the  square 
of  its  height,  then  multiply  the  sum  by  the 
height,  and  this  product  by  .5236,  for  the 
content. 

26.  How  is  the  capacity  or  content  of  a 
Gomer  chamber  computed  ? 

This  chamber  being  the  frustum  of  a  cone 
with  a  hemispherical  bottom,  its  capacity 
will  be  found  by  applying  the  foregoing- 
rules,  viz  :  first  find  the  content  of  the  frus- 
tum, then  that  of  the  spherical  segment  or 
bottom,  and  add  their  contents  into  one  sum 
for  the  capacity. 


172  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

27.  Mow  is  the  content  of  a  rectangular  box 
ascertained  ? 

Multiply  the  leng£b  !rv  the  breadth.  and 
this  product  by  the  depth. 

28.  How  is  the  capacity  of  a  cylinder  calcu- 
lated : 

Multiply  the  area  of  the  base  by  the 
height. 

£9.  How  is  the  content  of  a  barrel  found  f 
Multiply  half  the  sum  of  the  areas  of  the* 
two  interior  circles,  taken  at  the  head  and 
bung,  by  the  interior  length;  or,  to  the  area 
of  the  head  add  twice  the  area  at  the  bung, 
multiply  that  sum  by  the  length,  and  take 
one-third  of  the  product  for  the  content. 

30.  What  is  meant  by  the  term  enfilade  ? 
Sweeping   the   whole   extent   of  a    work, 

line  of  troops,  deck  of  a  ship,  etc.,  with  shot 
or  shells. 

31.  What  does  defilade  mean  ? 

The  art  of  disposing  guns,  troops,  or 
works  in  such  a  manner  that  they  shall  be 
protected  from  a  plunging  fire  from  adjoin- 
ing heights. 

32.  What  are  the  dimensions  required  for  an 
earthen  parapet  to  resist  the  fire  of  field  or  siege 
guns  ? 

6  feet  for  6-pdrs.;  14  feet  for  13-pdrs.;  18 
feet  for  SJ4:  or  18-pdrs.  Four  feet  of  oak  or 
brick  will  resist  cannon  shot. 

33.  What  thickness  of  ice  ivill  admit  the 
passage  of  infantry,  cavalry,  and  artillery  ? 

Ice  three  inches  thick  will  bear  infantry 
marching  in  file;  from  4£  to  6£  inches,  cav- 


MISCELLANEOUS. 


173 


airy  and  light  artillery;  and  beyond  that 
the  heaviest  gun-carriages  may  pass  in 
safety.  Ice  8  inches  thick  will  bear  nearly 
10  cwt.  upon  a  square  foot  without  danger. 

34.  How  is  the  size  of  a  rope  designated  ? 
By  its   circumference :    thus,  a   two-inch 

rope  is  a  rope  two  inches  in  circumference. 

35.  How  is  the  strength  of  a  hemp  rope,  or 
the  weight  it  will  support,  ascertained  ? 

Square  the  circumference  in  inches,  and 
divide  by  5,  for  the  weight  in  tons  that  it 
will  bear  suspended  from  it. 

36.  Hoid  can  the  breadth  of  a  river  be  ascer- 
tained without  instruments? 

As  follows : 


Fig.  6. 

1st.  The  line  AB  (the  distance  to  be  deter- 
mined )  is  extended  upon  the  bank  to  D,  from 


174  HAND-BOOK   OF   ARTILLERY. 

which  point,  after  having  marked  it,  lay  off 
equal  distances  DC  and  Cd  ;  produce  BC  to 
b,  making  Cb=CB ;  then  extend  the  line  db 
until  it  intersects  the  prolongation  of  the 
line  CA  at  a.  The  distance  ab  is  equal  to 
AB  or  the  width  of  the  river. 

2d.  Lay  off  any  convenient  distance,  BC, 
perpendicular  to  AB,  erect  a  perpendicular 
DC  to  AC,  note  the  pdint  D  where  it  in- 
tersects AB  produced;  measure  BI) ;   then 

AJy     ~BC 
BD* 

37.  How  can  the  breadth  of^a  river  be  ascer- 
tained by  means  of  the  peak  of  a  cap,  or  cocked 
hat  ? 

Place  yourself  at  the  edge  of  one  bank 
and  lower  the  peak  of  the  cap,  or  point  of 
the  hat,  till  the  edge  cut  the  other  bank, 
then  steady  your  head  by  placing  your  hand 
under  your  chin,  and  turn  gently  around  to 
some  level  spot  of  ground  on  your  own  side 
of  the  river,  and  observe  where  your  peak 
or  point  of  your  hat  again  meets  the  ground  ; 
measure  this  distance,  which  will  be  nearly 
the  breadth  of  the  river. 

38.  How  do  you  ascertain  the  distance  of  an 
object  by  means  of  the  tangent-scale  of  a  gun, 
the  height  of  the  object  at  the  required  distance 
being  known  ? 

Direct  the  line  of  metal  of  the  gun  on  the 
top  of  the  object;   then  raise  the  tangent- 


*Tbe  second  method  was  suggested  to  me  by  Captain, 
Vogdes,  1st  Artillery,  U.  S.  Army. 


MISCELLANEOUS.  175 

slide  till  the  top  of  it  and  notch  on  the  muz- 
zle are  in  line  with  the  foot  of  the  object, 
and  note  what  length  of  scale  is  required ; 
then  by  similar  triangles,  as  the  length  of 
the  raised  part  of  the  tangent-scale  is  to  the 
length  of  the  gun  so  is  the  height  of  the  dis- 
tant object  to  the  distance  required. 

39.  What  composition  may  be  used  for  greas- 
ing the  axle-trees  of  artillery  carriages  f 

Hogs'  lard,  softened  by  working  it.  If 
this  cannot  be  procured,  tallow  or  other 
grease  may  be  used;  if  hard,  it  should  be 
melted  with  fish-oil. 

40.  What  is  the  simplest  method  of  bursting 
open  strong  gates  ?   . 

Suspend  a  bag  of  gunpowder  containing 
50  or  60  lbs.  near  the  middle  of  the  gate, 
upon  a  nail  or  gimlet,  having  a  small  piece 
of  port-fire  inserted  at  the  bottom,  and  well 
secured  with  twine. 

41.  What  is  the  length  of  a  pendulum  to 
vibrate  seconds,  half  and  quarter  seconds  re- 
spectively f 

Seconds,  39.1  inches  ;  half  seconds,  9.8 
inches;  and  quarter  seconds,  2.45  inches. 

42.  Give  a  formula  for  determining  the 
length  of  the  seconds  pendulum  in  any  latitude. 

l^=-      '■ [32.1803  feet— 0.0821  cos.  2  lat.l 

9.8696044  L 

43.  How  are  the  times  of  a  single  oscillation 
of  two  pendxdums  to  each  other  ? 

As  the  square-roots  of  their  lengths. 


176  HAND-BOOK    OF   ARTILLERY. 

44.  Repeat  the  table  of  measures. 

10  tenths .1  inch. 

4  inches 1  hand. 

12  inches .1  foot. 

28  inches 1  pace. 

3  feet .1  Viiv.l. 

2  yards .  1  fathom. 

220  yards 1  furlong. 

1,760  yards     .  .....         1  mile. 

45.  Repeat  the  table  of  avoirdupois  weight. 

47.34735  grains 1  dram. 

16  drams 1  ounce. 

16  ounces 1  pound. 

28  lbs 1  quarter. 

4  qrs.,  or  112  lbs 1  cwt. 

20  cwt 1  ton. 

In  some  of  our  states  the  ton  is  estimated  at  2,000  lbs. 

46.  What  is  the  force  of  gravity  ? 

It  is  that  force  of  attraction  exerted  by 
the  earth  upon  all  particles  of  matter  which 
tends  to  urge  them  toward  its  centre. 

47.  What  is  the  specific  gravity  of  a  body  ? 
The  ratio  of  the  weight  of  a  body  to  that 

of  an  equal  volume  of  some  other  body  as- 
sumed as  a  standard,  usually  pure  distilled 
water  at  a  certain  temperature. 

48.  What  is  the  law  of  a\escent  of  falling 
bodies  ? 

The  spaces  fallen  through  from  the  com- 
mencement of  the  descent  are  proportional 
to  the  squares  of  the  times  elapsed. 

49.  What  compositions  are  made  use  of  for 
preserving  iron  cannon  ? 

1.  Black  lead,  pulverized 12 

Red  lead       .         .         .         .         .         .         .  12 

Litharge  ...."....  5 

Lampblack 5 

Linseed  oil 66 


MISCELLANEOUS.  177 

Boil  it  gently  about  twenty  minutes,  dur- 
ing which  time  it  must  be  constantly  stirred. 

2.  Umber,  ground 3.75 

Guni  shellac,  pulverized  .         .         .         .  3.75 

Ivory  black 3.75 

Litharge 3.75 

Linseed  oil  .         .         .         .         .         .         .78 

Spirits  of  turpentine         ....  7.25 

The  oil  must  be  first  boiled  half  an  hour; 
the  mixture  is  then  boiled  24  hours,  poured 
off  from  the  sediment,  and  put  in  jugs, 
corked. 

3.  Coal  tar  (of  good  quality)     ...        2  gals. 
Spirits  of  turpentine.  .         .         .1  pint. 

In  applying  lacker,  the  surface  of  the  iron 
must  be  first  cleaned  with  a  scraper  and  a 
wire  brush,  if  necessary,  and  the  lacker  ap- 
plied hot,  in  two  thin  coats,  with  a  paint- 
brush. It  is  better  to  do  it  in  summer.  Old 
lacker  should  be  removed  with  a  scraper,  or 
by  scouring,  and  not  by  heating  the  guns  or 
balls,  by  which  the  metal  is  injured. 

About  5  gallons  of  lacker  are  required  for 
100  field  guns  and  1,000  shot;  about  1  quart 
for  a  sea-coast  gun.  Before  the  lacker  is  ap- 
plied, every  particle  of  rust  is  removed  from 
the  gun,  and  the  vent  cleared  out. 

50.  How  many  gallons  does  a  cubic  foot  con- 
tain f 

7.48  gallons. 

51.  What  is  the  weight  of  a  gallon  of  dis- 
tilled water  ? 

At  the  maximum  density  (39°. 8  Fahr.), 
the  barometer  being  at  30  inches,  it  weighs 


178  HAND-BOOK    OF    ARTILLERY. 

8.38888  avoirdupois  pounds,  or  58373   troy 
grains. 

52.  What  arc  the  different  lengths  of  plum- 
mets for  regulating  the  march  of  infantry? 

Common  time 90  steps  in  a  minute,   17.37  inches. 

Quirk  time 110"     "  "  11.6    inches. 

Double-quick 140      "  «  7.18  inches. 

53.  How  is  a  plummet  made  ? 

By  means  of  a  musket  ball,  suspended  by 
a  silk  string,  upon  which  the  required 
lengths  are  marked  j  the  length  is  measured 
from  the  point  of  suspension  to  the  centre  of 
the  ball. 

54.  Explain  how  to  embark  and  disembark 
artillery  and  its  stores. 

1.  Divide  the  total  quantity  to  be  trans- 
ported among  the  vessels,  and  place  in  each 
vessel  everything  necessary  for  the  service 
required  at  the  moment  of  disembarkation, 
so  that  there  will  be  no  inconvenience  should 
other  vessels  be  delayed. 

2.  If  a  siege  is  to  be  undertaken,  place  in 
each  vessel  with  each  piece  of  artillery  its 
implements,  ammunition,  and  the  carriages 
necessary  to  transport  the  whole  or  a  part ; 
the  platforms,  tools,  instruments  and  mate- 
rials for  constructing  batteries;  skids,  rollers, 
scantling  and  plank. 

3.  If  a  particular  calibre  of  gun  is  neces- 
sary for  any  operation,  do  not  place  all  of 
one  kind  in  one  vessel,  to  avoid  being  en- 
tirely deprived  of  them  by  any  accident. 

4.  Dismount  the  carriages,  wagons,  and 
limbers,  by  taking  off  the  wheels  and  boxes, 
and,  if  absolutely  necessary,  the  axle-trees. 


MISCELLANEOUS.  179 

Place  in  the  boxes  the  linch-pins,  washers, 
etc.,  with  the  tools  required  for  putting  the 
carriage  together  again.  Number  each  car- 
riage, and  mark  each  detached  article  with 
the  number  of  the  carriage  to  which  it  be- 
longs. 

5.  The  contents  of  each  box,  barrel,  or 
bundle  should  be  marked  distinctly  upon  it. 
The  boxes  should  be  made  small  for  the  con- 
venience of  handling,  and  have  rope  handles 
to  lift  them  by. 

6.  Place  the  heaviest  articles  below,  begin- 
ning with  the  shot  and  shells  (empty),  then 
the  guns,  platforms,  carriages,  wagons,  lim- 
bers, ammunition-boxes,  etc.;  boxes  of  small 
arms  and  ammunition  in  the  dryest  and 
least  exposed  part  of  the  vessel.  Articles 
required  to  be  disembarked  first  should  be 
put  in  last,  or  so  placed  that  they  can  be 
readily  got  at. 

If  the  disembarkation  is  to  be  performed 
in  front  of  the  enemy,  some  of  the  field 
pieces  should  be  so  placed  that  they  can  be 
disembarked  immediately,  with  their  car- 
riages, implements,  and  ammunition ;  also 
the  tools  and  materials  for  throwing  up  tem- 
porary intrenchments  on  landing. 

7.  Some  vessels  should  be  laden  solely 
with  such  powder  and  ammunition  as  may 
not  be  required  for  the  immediate  service  of 
the  pieces. 

8.  On  a  smooth,  sandy  beach,  heavy 
pieces,  etc.,  may  be  landed  by  rolling  them 
overboard  as  soon  as  the  boats  ground,  and 
hauling  them  up  with  sling-carts. 


APPENDIX 


RIFLE      CANNON. 

1.  What  is  a  rifle? 

A  fire-arm  having  a  number  of  spiral 
grooves  cut  into  the  surface  of  its  bore,  for 
the  purpose  of  giving  the  projectile  a  motion 
of  rotation  about  a  line  coinciding  with  the 
direction  of  its  flight. 

2.  What  are  the  advantages  of  this  rotation? 
It  increases  the  range  of  the  projectile  by 

causing  it  to  move  through  the  air  in  the 
direction  of  its  least  resistance,  and  corrects 
the  cause  of  deviation  by  distributing  it  uni- 
formly around  the  line  of  flight. 

3.  What  projectiles  promise  to  be  most  suc- 
cessful for  heavy  guns  ? 

They  may  be  ranged  under  two  heads,  viz : 
1st.  Those  which  have  flanges  or  projections 
on  them  to  fit  into  the  grooves  of  the  gun  in 
loading,  the  flanges  being  of  a  softer  metal 
than  the  body  of  the  projectile.  2d.  Those 
constructed  on  an  expanding  principle,  the 
body  being  generally  of  cast-iron  and  the 
expanding  portion  being  a  band  or  cup  of 
some  softer  metal,  as  pewter,  copper  or  wrought- 
iron,  which  enters  the  bore  of  the  piece  free- 
ly in  loading,  but  which  is  forced  into  the 
grooves  by  the  discharge. 


APPENDIX.  181 

4.  What  determines  the  form  of  the  spiral 
grooves  ? 

The  angle  which  the  tangent  line  at  any 
point  makes  with  the  corresponding  element 
of  the  bore.  If  this  angle  be  the  same  at 
every  point,  the  groove  is  said  to  be  uniform. 
If  it  increases  from  the  breech  to  the  muz- 
zle, the  groove  is  called  increasing ;  if  the 
reverse,  decreasing. 

5.  Describe  the  different  modes  of  cutting  the 
grooves. 

1st.  The  barrel  ma}'  have  both  a  motion 
of  translation  and  rotation,  whilst  a  station- 
ary cutter  presses  upon  it.  2d.  The  barrel 
may  have  only  a  portion  of  rotation  while 
the  cutting  point  is  given  a  motion  of  trans- 
lation. 3d.  The  barrel  may  remain  station- 
ary, and  the  point  have  both  motions. 

6.  Which  of  these  is  the  practiced  method  of 
rifling  a  gun  ? 

The  last;  a  rod  armed  with  a  cutter  is 
moved  by  machinery  back  and  forth  in  the 
bore,  and  at  the  same  time  revolved  around 
its  axis.  If  the  velocities  of  translation  and 
rotation  be  both  uniform,  the  grooves  will 
be  uniform;  if  one  of  the  velocities  be  varia- 
ble, the  grooves  will  be  either  decreasing  or 
increasing,  depending  on  the  relative  veloci- 
ties in  the  two  directions. 

7.  What  is  understood  by  the  term  twist? 
It  is  employed  by  gun  makers  to  express 

the  inclination  of  a  groove  at  any  point,  and 
is  measured  by  the   tangent  of  the  angle 
16 


182  APPENDIX. 

made  by  the  groove  with* the  axis  of  the 
bore. 

8.  To  what  is  this  tangent  equal? 

To  the  quotient  obtained  by  dividing  the 
circumference  of  the  bore  by  the  length  of 
one  revolution  of  the  spiral  estimated  in  the 
direction  of  the  axis. 

9.  Has  the  most  suitable  inclination  of  grooves 
for  a  rifle  cannon  yet  been  determined  ? 

No ;  a  wide  diversity  of  twists  is  employ- 
ed by  different  experimenters. 

10.  Describe  the  Armstrong  gun. 

It  is  a  breech-loading  rifle  cannon,  com- 
posed wholly  of  wrought-iron,  the  promi- 
nent feature  in  its  manufacture  being  the 
combining  into  one  mass  of  iron  bars,  which 
are  first  coiled  into  spiral  tubes,  and  then 
welded  by  hammering.  From  the  muzzle 
to  the  trunnions  the  gun  is  made  of  one 
thickness,  but  in  rear  of  the  trunnions  two 
additional  layers  of  material  are  applied. 
The  rear  end  of  the  gun  receives  a  screw, 
which  presses  against  a  movable  plug  or 
stopper  for  closing  the  bore  when  the  gun 
is  loaded.  The  vent  is  contained  in  this 
stopper.  The  screw  is  hollow,  and  turned 
by  a  handle.  When  the  stopper  is  removed, 
the  passage  through  the  screw  may  be  re- 
garded as  a  prolongation  of  the  bore.  The 
bore  is  3  inches  in  diameter,  and  is  rifled  with 
iliirty-four  small  grooves.  It  is  widened  at 
the  breech  one-eighth  of  an  inch,  to  enable 
the  projectile  to  enter  freely  and  choke  at 
the  commencement  of  the  grooves.  The 
projectile  is  an  elongated  one,  made  of  cast- 


APPENDIX.  183 

Iron  thinly  coated  with  lead;  and  being  of 
somewhat  larger  diameter  than  the  bore,  the 
lead  is  crushed  into  the  grooves,  thus  secur- 
ing the  necessary  rotation  whilst  all  shake 
and  windage  is  prevented.  The  process  of 
loading  is  effected  by  placing  the  projectile, 
with  the  cartridge  and  a  greased  wad,  in  the 
hollow  of  the  breech-screw,  and  thrusting 
them,  either  separately  or  collectively,  by  a 
rammer  into  the  bore.  The  stopper  is  then 
dropped  into  its  place,  and  secured  by  turn- 
ing the  screw.  The  gun  is  fired  by  the  ordi- 
nary friction-tube.  The  greased  wad  renders 
unnecessary  the  use  of  a  sponge. 

The  largest  gun  which  has  yet  been  con- 
structed is  one  of  65  cwt.  and  throwing  a 
shot  weighing  upward  of  100  lbs. 

The  greatest  range  yet  attained  by  the 
Armstrong  gun  is  nearly  5i  miles.  The 
range  of  the  Armstrong  12-pdr.  field  gun  of 
8  cwt.,  at  an  elevation  of  5°,  and  with  a 
charge  of  1  lb.  8  oz.,  is  about  1,920  yards. 
Projectiles  have  been  fired  from  this  gun 
through  a  mass  of  oak  timber  9  feet  in 
thickness. 

Note. —  The  foregoing  description  of  the  Armstrong 
gun  is  condensed  from  the  5th  edition  of  Sir  H.  Douglass' 
Xaval  Gunnery,  to  which  the  reader  is  referred  for  a  com- 
plete description  of  the  gun  and  projectile. 


The  following  table  presents  a  synopsis  of  the  results  in 
case  of  some  of  the  rifle  cannon  tested  at  Fort  Monroe,  in 
1859,  by  a  Board  composed  of  Ordnance  and  Artillery  offi- 


184 


APPENMX. 


T  A  R  G  E  T 


Bore. 

Grooves. 

Name. 

Calibre. 

Twist. 

3 

Width. 

Depth. 

i 

1 

a 

s 

- 

fc 

in. 

in. 

in. 

in. 

Sawyer 

24-pr. 

5.SG2 

110 

6 

1.5 

0.25 

Uniform,  one  turn  in 

::!'.,  feet. 

Dimick 

32-pr. 

6.4 

101 

6 

2.0 

0.2 
rectanv 

increasing  from  0  to 
one  turn  in  62 }4  ft. 
at  muzzle:  twist  to 
the  right. 

Dr.  Reed... 

12-pr.  S'ge. 

4.854 

109 

7 

l-14th 
circum. 

.03  to  .OS 

Increasing  from  0  at 
commencement  to 
one  turn  in  50  feet 

at  muzzle. 

Do.     ... 

12rpr.Field 

4.636 

74 

7 

do. 

do. 

Do.         do. 

Do.     ... 

32-pr. 

6.425 

110 

3 

l-6th 

.085  to  .12 

Uniform,  one  turn  in 

t 

circum. 

circular. 

■Hi  feet. 

Do.     ... 

6-pr. 

3.69 

103.4 

3 

do. 

.077  to  .111 

circular. 

Uniform,  to  the  right 

one  turn  in  '-!.'>  feet. 

Capt.Dycr. 

3-pr. 

2.9 

44.5 

8 

0.4 

.05 

Uniform;  .mo  turn  in 

16  feet. 

Do.     ... 

G-pr.h'nze. 

3.67 

57.5 

1'6 

0.5 

.025 

Uniform,  one  turn  in 
19  feet. 

The  following  is  the  description  of  the  several  projectiles,  viz  : 

Sawyer's. — Flanged  projectile;  elongated;  entire  shell  coated  with 
an  alloy,  chiefly  of  lead,  and  has  a  percussion-cap  on 
small  end. 

Dimick's. — Expanding  shell:  elongated;  cup  of  soft  metal  cast  on 
rear  end  of  projectile. 

PtEED's. — The  body  is  of  cast-iron,  and  the  expanding  portion  is  a 
cup  of  wro tight-iron,  which  is  fastened  to  the  body  by 
inserting  it  in  the  mould  and  pouring  the  melted  met- 
al around  it. 


Dyer's. — Description  nearly  tho  same  as  that  of  Dimick's. 


APPENDIX. 


185 


4  0'  by  2  0' 


© 

1,000  Yards. 

2.000  Yards. 

1 

Pm 

|C 

o  . 

bD 

r. 
Xi 
O 

o 

I 

s 

hi 

1 

i 

® 

_© 

C 
I     . 

-  a 

c 

5 

o 

7? 

o 

o 
» 

•S3 

o    . 

O   to 
°« 

4 
• 

®  5" 

1 

5 

— 

0 

1 

00 

o 

.C 

ID 

o  o 

o 

■848 

CD 

id 

o 

O 

s> 

o 

© 

a 

& 

1* 

t= 

B 

h 

£ 

<1 

&H 

fc 

z 

fe 

< 

H 

«* 

- 

H 

lbs. 

lbs. 

lbs. 

o    / 

" 

o     / 

« 

o     / 

" 

8822 

45 

5M 

15 

13 

2 

2 

119 

32 

17 

4  30 

6 

4359 

13  30 

9300 

51 

6 

7 

5 

1 

2  15 

58 

21 

6 

5 

6X 

5000 

22 

3 

26 

14 

9 

2  15 

30 

6 

8 

4  30 

1900 

15 

2 

48 

16 

3 

2 

3 

84 

19 

8 

5 

«H 

3665 

11  30 

8500 

50 

6 

10 

8 

2 

2  15 

3 

52 

9 

5 

4  45 

1200 

12 

1 

28 

18 

4 

2  10 

18 

4 

2 

5^ 

7 

3270 

13  30 

16 

250 

9 

28 

16 

5 

2  25 

S80 

14 

*M 

22 

11 

4 

2  15 

Tbe  following  is  extracted  from  the  Report  of  the  Board : 

'■The  method  of  obtaining  rifle  motion  in  these  different  guns  is  of  two  kinds  : 

"1.  Flanged  projectiles  entering  into  the  grooves  of  the  gun. 

'■2.  Expanding  projectiles,  which  are  forced  into  the  groove  by  the  action  of 
the  charge.  Although  the  flanged  projectile,  when  made  with  great  precision, 
has  given  good  results,  as  shown  by  the  tables  of  firing,  the  extreme  nicety  in 
its  fabrication,  and  the  care  and  trouble  required  to  load  the  gun,  particularly 
when  it  becomes  foul  by  firing,  seem  to  render  it  not  as  suitable  for  service  as 
the  expanding  projectile.  ******* 

"  From  the  results  obtained,  the  conclusion  is  inevitable  that  the  era  of  smooth- 
bore field  artillery  has  passed  away,  and  that  the  period  for  the  adoption  of  rifle 
cannon,  for  siege  and  garrison  service,  cannot  be  remote.  The  superiority  of 
elongated  projectiles,  whether  solid  or  hollow,  with  the  rifle  rotation,  as  regards 
economy  of  ammunition,  extent  of  range,  and  uniformity  and  accuracy  of  effect 
over  the  present  system,  is  decided  and  unqxiestionable." 

16* 


INDEX 


Air  :  Resistance  of,  162. 

Ammunition:  For  field  battery, 
44:  for  siege  train,  39,  40;  stor- 
age, 113:  preparation,  101,  2. 
108,  9;  weights  of,  fixed,  117. 

Angle:  Of  greatest  range  71:  of 
fall.  SO :  of  least  elevation  for 
mortars,  72;  of  elevation  for 
stone-mortars,  72 — Natural  an- 
gle of  sight,  13 ;  of  guns,  28 :  of 
howitzers,  31 ;  of  columbiads,  32. 

Animal  Power,  168. 

Arc.  elevating.  19. 

Area  of  a  circle,  170. 

Armstrong  Gun,  182. 

Artificial  Line  of  Sight,  57. 

Artillery:  Definition,  9— Meth 
of  cni  barking  and  disembarking 
178. 9 — Carriages  (see  carriages) 
— Kinds  of,  9;  how  distinguish 
ed,  9 — Proportion  of  to  infan- 
try, 44 — Proportion  of  different 
kinds  in  a  field  train.  43;  in 
siege  train,  38 ;  for  mountain 
service.  45;  for  armament  of 
forts.  37 — How  rendered  unser- 
viceable, 21,  2. 

Astragal  and  Fillets;  Defini- 
tion, 14. 

Attack  of  a  post,  165. 

Avoirdupois  Weight,  176. 

Axis  of  a  Piece  :  Definition,  12. 


B. 


Balls:  Diameters  and  weights, 
115;  computation  of  weight  and 
diameter,  104 ;  piling,  112 ;  num- 
ber in  a  pile,  114;    fire.  101; 


light,  101.  smoke,  101;  pene- 
tration, 164.  5. 

Barbette  Carriage:  Kinds,  145 
—  Parts  composing,  145  —  De- 
scription. 145,  6. 

Barrels  :  For  gunpowder,  mark- 
ing, 95;  piling,  96:  transporta- 
tion, 97";  rolling.  92. 

Battery:  Definition  of,  11 — Of 
field  artillery,  composition,  44; 
tactics,  46.  7,  8,  9,  50, 1,  2,  3,  4— 
Mountain  artillery.  45 — Ammu- 
nition for  field  battery,  44. 

Battery- Wagon.  157,  8. 

Beds,  mortar :  Weights,  35— Truu- 
niou-beds,  141 — Siege  mortar, 
142— Coehorn,  143— Epronvette, 
143 — Heavy  sea-coast,  144. 

Base-ring  :  Definition.  13. 

Base  of  the  Breech:  Definition 
of,  13. 

Board,  Pointing,  63. 

Bore  :  Definition,  14 ;  bottom  of, 
15. 

Bormann  Fuse,  122,  3. 

Brass  Cannon  :  External  injury, 
24. 

Breaching  :  Battery,  best  position 
for,  41 ;  manner  of,  41 ;  time  re- 
quired, 41. 

Breadth  of  a  river  ascertained, 
173,  4. 

Breech  :  Definition,  13 — Sights, 
17 ;  how  used,  57  ;  construction, 
18  ;  pieces  supplied  with,  18. 

Bronze:  Objections  to,  for  can- 
non, 10;  why  used  for  field 
pieces,  10;  kinds  of  bronze 
pieces  used,  11. 

Burning  gunpowder:  Quickness 
of,  94. 


INDEX. 


187 


■  Bursting  of'en  gates,  175. 

Bushing  a  piece,  21;  metal  used 
for,  in  bronze  pieces,  21;  object 
of,  21,  all  new  artillery  not 
bushed,  21. 

C. 

Caisson  :      Description    of.   156  : 

number  with  a  field  battery,  44. 

Caking  of  powder  prevented,  07. 

Calibre:  Definition.  12;  number 

in  a  piece  ascertained.  12. 
Canisters,  99  :  For  field  service. 
how  made,  102;  for  siege  and 
searcoost    service,    how    made, 
103— how  piled,  113. 
Cannon  :  Bore.  12— Brass,  exter- 
nal and  internal  injuries.  24 — 
Dimensions,  how  regulated.  11 
— For  siege  train,  38 — Iron,  in- 
juries, 20 :  preservation  of,  26 
service    of.    how    judged.    26 — 
How  marked.  23 — Condemned 
cannon,  how  marked.  23 — Proof 
of.  23— Kinds.  9— Length  of,  29. 
30,  31,  35— Rifle  cannon,  16S.  69, 
70,  1.  2.  3. 
Carcasses,  100. 

Carriages  :    Classification,    134 — 
Movable,   134:  field   gun,    136; 
mountain  artillery,  138:  prairie, 
139;    limbers,  137:  siege   gun, 
139— Stationary,  141:  barbette, 
144,  5 :   casemate,  151 ;   colum- 
biad,  149,   50  ;   flank-casemate. 
153  _  Mortar-beds.    143,     4  — 
Wrought-iron,  155 — Number  in 
a  field  battery,  44. 
Cartridge-bags  :  Where  filled,  97. 
Cartriges  :  For  hot  shot,  105. 
Cascable,  13. 
Casemate:  Carriage,  151,  2— Gin, 

161. 
Chamber:  Definition,  15;  object 
of,  34;  form  for  mortars.  34; 
for  howitzers,  30;  for  eprou- 
vette,  35  ;  gomer,  34. 
Charges  :  Definition,  65,  —  For 
breaching,  65 — For  double  shot 
65 — For  field  guns  and  howit 
zers,  67 — For  fire-balls,  66 — For 
heavy  guns,  columbiads  and 
howitzers,  67 — Service  charge 
for    heavy   guns,   65 — For  hot 


shot,  65 — Greatest  charges  for 
mortars,  67 — For  mortars,  how 
regulated.  66 — For  ricochet  fir- 
ing. 65— For  shells  fired  from 
columbiads  and  heavy  guns, 
118— For  field  shells.  118— For 
mortar  shells.  117 — For  spheri- 
cal-case shot,  118. 

Chase  :  Definition,  14. 

Chassis  :  For  barbette  carriage. 
147  — For  casemate  carriage. 
152— For  columbiad,  150,  1  — 
For  flank-casemate.  154  —  For 
wrought-iron  carriage.  156. 

CHEEfcS,  1.35. 

Coehorn  Mortar  :  Diameter.  35 — 
"Weight  of  bed.  35— Length  of. 
36—  Length  of  bore.  36— Length 
of  chamber, 36 — Use.  36 — Great- 
est charge  for,  67 — Bed,  descrip- 
tion of,  143. 

Columbiads  :  Definition,  32  — 
Windage,  S9  —  Charges.  67  — 
Chamber.  32 — Peculiarities,  32 
—Weights.  32— Length,  32— 
Natural  angle  of  sight,  32 — 
Gun-carriage,  149;  chassis,  150 
—Shells,  charges  for,  117,  18; 
method  of  loading,  111. 

Composition,  for  preserving  iron 
pieces,  176, 77;  application,  177; 
for  axle-trees  of  carriages.  175. 

Condemned  cannon,  how  marked, 
23;  shot,  how  marked.  112. 

Content:  Of  a  barrel,  172;  box, 
172;  conic  frustum.  171:  gomer 
chamber.  171;  spherical  seg- 
ment, 171;  cylinder,  172. 

Cylinder  Mill,  92. 


Day's  March:  Of  field  artillery, 
169. 

Defilade  :  Definition,  172. 

Depth  of  Penetration  of  balls, 
165. 

Descent  of  falling  bodies:  Law 
of,  176. 

Diameter  :  Of  coehorn  mortar,  35: 
of  eprouvette,  35;  ot  stone-mor- 
tar, 35:  of  cast-iron  shot,  how 
found,  104;  of  shot,  shells,  and 
spherical-case,  115 ;  of  vent,  16. 

Dimensions:  Of  cannon,  how  reg- 


188 


TNDEX. 


ulated,  11:  of  a  parapet  to  re-!  Field  Battery:  Number  of  pieces. 


tillerv.  172. 

Dipping  of  the  Muzzle,  85. 

Discharges :  Number  an  iron 
gun  can  sustain.  42. 

Dimi.  of  8  wheel.  105. 

Direction,  how  given:  To  guns 
and  howitzers.  56;  to  mortars, 
61.  2,  3— At  night,  59.  60,  64 
— When  wheels  are  not  on  the 
same  level,  58. 

Distance  :  For  firing  field  pieces, 
50 — Ascertained  by  soundT  167 — 
Determined  by  a  tangent-scale, 
17-1— Of  recoil.  84— Of  ricochet 
battery  from  object,  81. 

Dispart:  Definition,  13. 

Dolphins  :  Definition,  20 ;  pieces 
furnished  with,  20. 

Driving  out  shot  wedged  in  the 
bore,  22. 


Elevation:  Necessity  for,  55 — 
how  given  to  guns  and  howit- 
zers, 56;  to  mortars,  61;  instru- 
ments for,  57  —  Angle  of,  for 
mortars,  72;  greatest  angle  in 
vacuo,  71 ;  angle  of,  for  ricochet 
fire,  80. 

Elevating  Arc,  19. 

Embarking   artillery    and    its 
stores,  178,  9. 

Enfilade  :  Definition,  172. 

Enfilading  a  work,  79,  SO,  81 
Object  to  be  fired  at,  79. 

Eprouvette,  11;  form  of  cham- 
ber, 35— Calibre.  35— Use  of,  36 
—Bed.  35,  143— Length  of  bore 
35. 

Expansion  of  hot  shot,  105. 

External  injury  to  cannon,  24. 


Face  of  the  piece :  Definition  of, 

14. 
Fall  :  Point  of,  80— Angle  of,  80. 
Falling  Bodies,  law  of  descent, 

176. 
Field    Artillery:    Charges   for, 

67— Kinds,  43— Tactics,  47-54. 


44 — Battery  of  horse- artillery, 
44 — Composition  of,  on  a  war 
establishment,  44— Composition 
of  mountain  howitzer  battery. 
45 — Ammunition,  44 — Draught  - 
horses,  45. 
Field  Gun.  how   mounted,  47 — 

Charges  for.  67. 
Field  Carriages  :  Kinds  of,  136— 
Description,  137. 

Field  and  Siegb  Qas,  160. 

Field  Shells:  Loading,  109— 
Charges,  118. 

Field-Park,  45:  quantity  of  sup- 
plies for.  45  :  carriages,  46. 

Filling  :  Mortar  shells.  Ill;  co- 
Lumbiad  shells,  etc.,  111. 

Fire-Balls  :  Definition,  101  — 
Charges,  66 — How  preserved, 
114. 

Firing  :  Field  pieces,  49.  50,  51 — 
Rapidity  of,  for  mortars,  36 ;  for 
field  pieces,  50 — Within  point- 
blank  range,  rule  for,  56 — At 
night  with  guns  and  howitzers. 
59:  with  mortars,  64 — Mode  of 
facilitating  firing  for  any  given 
distance.  59:  use  of  remarkable 
points  on  the  ground,  59 — Rico- 
chet firing,  79 — Effect  of  firing 
upward  under  a  Urge  angle,  To. 

Fixed  Ammunition:  Storing,  113 
—Weights  of,  117. 

Flight  of  Projectiles:  Time  of. 
164. 

Flank-casemate,  carriage,  153. 

Foot,  number  of  gallons  in  a  cu- 
bic, 177. 

Foot  Soldier,  space  occupied  by, 
in  ranks,  170. 

Forge,  157  —  Portable,  158  — 
Number  with  a  field  battery, 
44;  with  a  field  park,  46. 

Forces  acting  on  a  projectile,  55. 

Force  of  gravity,  176. 

Friction  Primer  :  Description, 
126  ;  advantages  of,  127. 

Furnaces  for  hot  shot,  106. 

Fuzes:  Definition,  119— -Wooden, 
119— Paper,  121— Borraann,  122 
— U.  S.  sea-coast,  124— Compo- 
sition for  mortar-fuzes,  120 ;  for 
paper  fuzes,  122- 


INDEX. 


189 


for  siege  gun.  141 — Wright 
168. 

Horse-Artillery  :  Peculiar  ad- 
vantages of.  4<i. 

Hot  Shot,  105 — Loading  with, 
105 — Expansion  of.  105. 

Howitzers:  Definition.. 30 — Kinds 


Gins :  Field  and  Siege,  160 ;  gar- 
rison, 160;  casemate,  161. 

.Gomeii  Chamber.  :;4. 

Grape  Shot.  99  ;  weight  of.  116. 

Grates  for  heating  shot.  106. 

Gravity  :  Specific.  1715 — Force  ofl 
176. 

Grease  for  wheels.  175. 

Grooves  for  rifle  cannon.  181. 

Grenades,  99 — Angle  of  eleva- 
tion for,  when  thrown  from 
stone-mortars,  73 — Hand  and 
rampart,  100. 

Grommet  i,  108. 

<ii\s:     Definition,    28 — Lengths,  I. 

29— Weights,    29— Proof,   23—1 
Ranges,    74.   5,    6,   7.   8  —  No- Ioe :  Strength  of,  172. 
meiH-lature,  13,    14.    15 — Prin-  Implements  :     Quadrant 


of.  and  wrights.  31 — Lengths, 
81 — Number  in  field  battery, 
44:  in  siege  train,  38 — Cham- 
ber, form  of.  30— Advantages 
nt.  80— Projectiles  used  with, 
30 — Natural  angle  of  sight  <>f. 
31 — Charges  for,  67 — Pointing, 
55. 


cipal  parts  of,  28— Projectiles 

used  with,  29 — How  mounted, 
29 — Natural  angle  of  sight  of, 
28. 

GUN  Metal:  Bronze.  9,  10 — Cast- 
iron.  10. 

Gunners'  Implements:  Level,  19 
—Quadrant.  19— How  used,  67. 

Gcn-Carrtages ;  Field.  136;  siege, 
189;  barbetteJ144  5,6;  casemate, 
151;  flank-casemate^l53:  moun- 
tain howitzer.  138;  wrought- 
iroii.  155;  prairie.  139;  colum- 
biad,  149. 

Gunpowder:  Materials,  90 — Pro- 
portions,90 — Manufacture.  91 — 
Qualities  of,  95 — Packing,  95 — 
Proving,  94 — Expansive  velo- 
city and  pressure,  95 — Hygro- 
metric  proof  of.  94 —  Relative 
quickness  of,  94 — Preservation 
and  storage,  96 — Transporta- 
tion, 97— Weight  of,  95. 


II. 


Handcart,  159. 

Hand  Sling-cart.  159,  60. 

Hausse  :  Pendulum,  18. 

Hat:  Weight  of.  170. 

Horses:  Number  required  for  a 
field  battery.  45 :  for  siege  train, 
39 — Power  of,  168 — Space  occu- 
pied by,  168 — Number  required. 


19; 
breech-sight,  17:  pendulum- 
hausse,  Is:  gunner's  perpen- 
dicular, 19;  pointing-stakes, 
62 :  pointing-wires,  61  ;  plum- 
met. 19,  63;  pointing-cord,  62. 

Incendiary  Composition,  128. 

Injuries  to  cannon,  24,  5. 

Ikon  preferred  to  bronse,  10. 

Iron  Cannon,  used  in  land  ser- 
vice. 10,  11. 

Initial  Velocity,  162. 

J. 

Junk  Wads,  108. 


K. 


Knob  of  cascable,  13 ;  use  of,  20. 


Lacker,  for  iron  guns,  176,  7. 

Length  of  cannon  ;  Definition  of, 
12;  extreme  length.  12. 

Line:  Of  fire,  69— Of  metal.  12 ; 
how  directed.  56,  7  :  not  perma- 
nent. 58 — Artificial  line  of 
sight.  57. 

Light-Balls,  101. 

Limbers  :  For  field  carriages,  137 ; 
for  siege  carriages,  141. 

Loading:  With  hot  shot,  105— 
Field  8hells,109— Spherical-case, 


190 


INDEX. 


109— Mortar  shells.  Ill— Shells 
for  columbiads  and  other  heavy 
guns,  111. 

M. 

Magazines:  Moisture  of.  how 
absorbed.  97:  powder  stored  in, 
96  :  precautions  to  be  observed 
when  open,  97. 

Marking  :  Camion. 23:  condemned 
shot  and  shell,  112;  powder 
barrels,  95. 

MARCHES:  Horse-artillery,  field 
artillery,  cavalry  and  infantry, 
169. 

Match  :  Quick.  127  ;  slow,  127. 

Metals  for  artillery,  9. 

Momentum,  167.  ' 

Mortar-Wagon.  159. 

Mortars.  33— Advantages  of.  33 
— Lengths  and  weights,  35 — 
Kinds,  ll  —  Beds,  weights  of 
35  — Platform.  132  — Form  of 
chamber,  34 — Length  of  cham- 
ber and  of  bore,  35,  6 — Kinds 
of  projectiles  used  with,  36 — 
Rapidity  of  fire  of  siege  mortars, 
36— Pointing,  61,  2.3.  4— Great- 
est charges  for,  67 — Angles  of 
elevation  for. 71. 2. 3 — Siege  mor- 
tar-beds, 143 — Coehorn  mortar- 
bed,  143  — Eprouvette  bed,  143 
— Sea-coast  mortar-bed,  144. 

Mountain  Artillery  :  Dimen- 
sion and  weights  of;  31 — Com- 
position of  a  battery,  44  — 
Ranges,  75.  6.  7.  8. 

Mules:  Strength  of.  108. 

Muzzle  :  Definition,  15 — Sight,  18. 


N. 


Natural  Angle  of  sight,  13. 
Neck  :  Definition,  14. 
Nomenclature  of  a  piece,  13, 14, 

15. 
Night    Firing:    With  guns  and 

howitzers,  59;  with  mortars,  64. 


Oats  :  Weight  of,  170. 


P. 

Pack-horses.  168. 

Pi  mhi  i  m-I!  usse.  18. 

Pendulums  :  Length  of.  175. 

Penetration  of  balls:  in  mason- 
ry. 165;  in  earth.  165. 

Perpendicular,  gunner's,  19. 

Piling  :  Balls.  112— Canisters.  113 
— Loaded  shells.  114 — Powder 
barrels,  96 — Number  of  shot  in 
a  pile,  114. 

Platforms.  129— Siege,  130— Mor- 
tar, 132— Rail,  132— Ricochet, 
133. 

Plummet:  For  mortar  service,  19, 
63  —  For  regulating  march  of 
infantry,  178. 

Point-Blank  Range,  68,  9 — Cau- 
ses which  vary  it.  69 — Effect 
on  it  of  firing  upward  under  a 
large  angle,  70. 

Pointing  :  Guns  and  howitzers, 
55— Mortars.  61— Stakes,  62— 
Wires.  61— Cord,  62— Board,  63. 

Point  of  fall,  80. 

Port  Fires,  125— Composition  for, 
126. 

Prairie  Carriage,  139. 

Preponderance  :  Definition,  20— 
Why  given.  21. 

Primers:  Friction.  126. 

Priming  Tubes,  126. 

Preservation:  Of  cannon,  26 — 
Fixed  ammunition,  113 — Balls 
112 — Grape  and  canister.  112 — 
Fire-balls.  114. 

Projectiles:  Solid  shot,  98 — 
Shell,  98— Spherical  case,  9S— 
Canister,  99— Grape,  99— Gre- 
nades, 99 — Carcasses,  100 — Fire- 
balls, 101— Light-balls,  101— 
Smoke-balls,  101  — Hot  shot, 
105 — Forces  acting  on,  when 
fired  from  a  piece,  55 — Kind 
used  with  field-pieces,  and  dis- 
tance at  which  they  should  be 
employed,  50. 

Q. 

Quadrant,    gunner's,    19;    How 

used,  57. 
Quarter-Sights,  17. 


INDEX. 


191 


Quick-Match,  127 — How  set  fire 
to,  128. 

R. 

Ranges:  Definition,  68  — Point- 
blank,  68 — British  point-blank, 
68 — Causes  which  vary  point- 
blank,  69 — Extreme  range.  71 — 
Angle  of  greatest  range  in  va- 
cuo, 71— Tables  of,  74,  5,  6,  7,  8 
— How  ascertained,  164. 

Rate  of  March  of  horse-artillery, 
cavalry  and  infantry,  169. 

Recoil  :  'Definition,  84— Cause  of, 
84— Amount,  84 — Has  no  ap- 
preciable effect  on  flight  of 
projectile,  85 — Influence  of  po- 
sition of  axis  of  trunnions  on, 
85,6. 

Reinforce,  13— Band,  14. 

Resistance  of  Air  to  projectiles, 
162. 

Ricochet  :  Definition,  79— Object 
of,  79 — How  conducted,  81 — 
Advantages  of,  79 — Nature  of, 
SI — Charges  for  a  flattened  ri- 
cochet. 83 :  for  curvatcd,  83 — 
Tables  of  richochet  firing,  83— 
Pieces  best  adapted  for,  81 — 
Distance  from  object  of  ricochet 
battery,  81— Greatest  angle  of 
elevation  for  ricochet  firing, 
80. 

Rifle  Cannon  :  Experiments  at 
Fort  Monroe,  183,  4,  5— Arm- 
strong gun,  182. 

Rimbases,  14. 

Ring  Wads,  108.    . 

Rivers  :  Breadth,  173,  4. 

Rolling-Barrels,  92. 

Ropes  :  Size  and  .strength  of,  173. 


Sabots:  Difference  in,  for  field 
service,  102 — Arrangement  for 
field  guns  and  12-pdr.  field  how- 
itzer, 101 — in  24  and  32-pdr. 
field  howitzers,  101—  Mode  of 
fastening  sabots  to  projectiles 
for  field  service,  102  ;  for  heavy 
shells.  103 :  for  canisters,  103 ; 
for  grape  shot,  103. 


Sea-Coast  Pieces,  how  mounted 
37 — Number  and  kind  required 
for  seaboard  forts,  37 — Heavy 
sea-coast  mortar-bed,  144. 

Scaling  a  piece.  23. 

Shells,  98:  Dimensions  and 
weights,  115 — Mode  of  comput- 
ing weight  of.  104 — Quantity  of 
powder  to  fill,  104 — Strapping, 
102  — Loading,  109,  10,  11— 
Ranges.  74,  5,  6,  7,  8  — Con- 
demned, how  marked,  112 — Ve- 
locity of.  162. 

Shot  :  Solid,  98— Hollow,  98— 
Rule  for  finding  weights  and  di- 
ameters of  cast-iron  shot,  104 — 
Condemned  shot,  how  marked, 
112 — Piling,  112 — Preservation, 
112 — Forces  acting  on  a  shot, 
55  —  Penetration,  165  —  Time 
required  to  heat,  106 — Expan- 
sion of,  by  heat.  105 — Ranges 
of,  74,  5,  6,  7,  8— Method  of  driv- 
ing out  shot  wedged  in  the 
bore,  22 — Velocity,  162. 

Sights  of  a  piece:' Definition.  12 
— How  determined,  12— Quar- 
ter, 17. 

Siege  Artillery:  Kinds,  38 — 
Proportions  in  a  siege  train,  38: 
of  carriages.  38 ;  draught-horses, 
39;  projectiles  and  ammuni- 
tion, 39,  40 — Siege  mortar-beds, 
143. 

Sling-Cart  :  Hand,  159,  60. 

Sluw-Match.  127. 

Smoke-Balls,  101. 

Sound  :  Velocity,  167 — Distance, 
determined  by,  167. 

Specific  Gravity,  176. 

Spherical-case,  98 — Loading,  109. 

Spiking  cannon,  21. 

Stakes,  pointing;  how  planted,  62. 

Stone  -  Mortar:  Length,  35  — 
Weight.36— Calibre,35— Length 
of  bore,  36 — Length  of  cham- 
ber. 36  — Use  of.  36  — Stones, 
how  disposed  of,  36. 

Storing  of  fixed  ammunition,  113. 

Strapping  Shot  and  Shells,  102. 

Strength  :  Of  ice,  172— Of  rope,  • 
173. 

Swell  of  the  muzzle,  14. 


192 


IM>KX. 


Tabubs  :  Of  charges,  67— Of  »nse8) 
74.  o.  6,  7.  8— Of  windage,  88,  '■' 
__0fweight8ofprqjectiles.ll5, 
16, 17— <  »f  measures,  I  Jo,  b — or 
avoirdupois  weight,  176. 

.  of  field  artilleiy,  47,  8,  », 
50,1,2,3,4.  # 

'I'WCKNT-SCM.K.  17. 

Tim:,  op  EUght  for  Biege  mortars, 

ii,,w  found,  104. 
Trajectory,  69. 

Transportation:  ot  artillery  by 
aea,    178,    9  —  Of   Biege    guns, 

Traverse  circles.  US. 

Tin  nnions:  Definition,  14— Use, 
20— Position  in  mortars,  33— 
Beds.  141.  .        -. 

True  Windage  :  Definition,  15. 


I    round,  1W— Lou  "f.  bj  wind- 
age, 's7. 
Vkm:    Definitions   16— Position 
and  diameter  of,  16. 

Vertical  Fire,  33. 


U. 

Unspiking  cannon,  22. 
V. 


Wads:  Oro«met,  108— Jul*,  108 
—Hay,  for  firing  hoi  shot,  107. 

Water:    Weight  of  177— Allow 
ance  for  a  man  and  a  horse,  170. 

Weights:  Guns, 29— Columl 
32— Howitzers,  31 
— Projectiles,  115, 16— Of  « 
for  field  carriages,  158;  and  for 
siege  carriages,158— Proportion 
between  weights  of  Bhot,  1"4 — 
Of  cast-iron  shot  or  shell, 
determined,    104— Quart 
powder   to    till    a    shell,    how 
found.  104— Carried  bj  h 
168— Carried,    by    an    infantry 
soldier,  170.  . 

WnEELs:  Field  carriage,  size  and 
weight,  K8— Siege  carriage,  sum 
and  weight,  158— Parts  of.  135. 
WINDAGE  :  Definition.  S7— Aint., 
88,9— Loss  of  velocity  bjr, 
Advantage   of  a  reduction  ot 


Valenciennes  composition,  128 
Velocity:  Of  halls,  ir.12— Loss  of. |     87. 
llv 'resistance  of  air,  162-Of ,  Wibes,  pointing, 61. 


>    >   > 


^P^SF-^  4  i>;> 


:2B*>> 


t£3BHlfl 

>*>>J"" 


•^^»r/^ 


,,3v?>>>vj>_j3Bg>  ^3>>» 


■    »  >; 


|§llI5b?>>- 


L3*>>    ^s» 


jg») 


»^>      ~  ■-£*>) 


i:^>^» 


3*> 


".aieii»>'aeB» 


jaiistlS^L^s^ 


>     : 


»  ^  2> 


~C2> 


>^s^>> 


^3g>^ 


?g®lg>..-.v£RM* 


•■Dipa* 


